FOREWORD
The Iranian Petroleum Standards (IPS) reflect the
views of the Iranian Ministry of Petroleum and are
intended for use in the oil and gas production
facilities,
oil
refineries,
chemical
and
petrochemical plants, gas handling and processing
installations and other such facilities.
IPS is based on internationally acceptable
standards and includes selections from the items
stipulated in the referenced standards. They are
also supplemented by additional requirements
and/or modifications based on the experience
acquired by the Iranian Petroleum Industry and
the local market availability. The options which
are not specified in the text of the standards are
itemized in data sheet/s, so that, the user can
select his appropriate preferences therein.
The IPS standards are therefore expected to be
sufficiently flexible so that the users can adapt
these standards to their requirements. However,
they may not cover every requirement of each
project. For such cases, an addendum to IPS
Standard shall be prepared by the user which
elaborates the particular requirements of the user.
This addendum together with the relevant IPS
shall form the job specification for the specific
project or work.
The IPS is reviewed and up-dated approximately
every five years. Each standards are subject to
amendment or withdrawal, if required, thus the
latest edition of IPS shall be applicable
The users of IPS are therefore requested to send
their views and comments, including any
addendum prepared for particular cases to the
following address. These comments and
recommendations will be reviewed by the relevant
technical committee and in case of approval will
be incorporated in the next revision of the
standard.
Standards and Research department
No.19, Street14, North kheradmand
Karimkhan Avenue, Tehran, Iran .
Postal Code- 1585886851
Tel: 88810459-60 & 66153055
Fax: 88810462
Email: Standards@nioc.org
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﻔﺘﺎر‬
‫( ﻣﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه دﻳﺪﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎي‬IPS) ‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻧﻔﺖ اﻳﺮان‬
‫وزارت ﻧﻔﺖ اﻳﺮان اﺳﺖ و ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎت ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻧﻔﺖ‬
،‫ واﺣﺪﻫﺎي ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻲ و ﭘﺘﺮوﺷﻴﻤﻲ‬،‫ ﭘﺎﻻﻳﺸﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎي ﻧﻔﺖ‬،‫و ﮔﺎز‬
‫ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎت اﻧﺘﻘﺎل و ﻓﺮاورش ﮔﺎز و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎت ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ‬
.‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮل‬،‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻧﻔﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦاﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه و ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﮔﺰﻳﺪهﻫﺎﺋﻲ از اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي‬
‫ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻴﺎت ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﻧﻔﺖ ﻛﺸﻮر‬.‫ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻮاردي‬،‫و ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻻ از ﺑﺎزار داﺧﻠﻲ و ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻴﺎز‬
.‫ﺑﻄﻮر ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ و ﻳﺎ اﺻﻼﺣﻲ در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻟﺤﺎظ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮاردي از ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎي ﻓﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﺘﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎ آورده ﻧﺸﺪه‬
‫اﺳﺖ در داده ﺑﺮگﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮرت ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔﺬاري ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
.‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮان آورده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺸﻜﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً اﻧﻌﻄﺎف ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺗﺪوﻳﻦ ﺷﺪه‬،‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻧﻔﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺎ‬.‫اﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮان ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﻴﺎزﻫﺎي ﺧﻮد را ﺑﺎ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺣﺎل ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻧﻴﺎزﻣﻨﺪيﻫﺎي ﭘﺮوژه ﻫﺎ را ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‬
‫ در اﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮارد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻟﺤﺎﻗﻴﻪاي ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎزﻫﺎي ﺧﺎص‬.‫ﻧﺪﻫﻨﺪ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ اﻟﺤﺎﻗﻴﻪ‬.‫آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ و ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ آن ﭘﺮوژه و ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎر‬،‫ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬
.‫ﺧﺎص را ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ داد‬
‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻧﻔﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻫﺮ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺳﺎل ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﻣﻮرد ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻗﺮار‬
‫ در اﻳﻦ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬.‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ و روزآﻣﺪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردي ﺣﺬف و ﻳﺎ اﻟﺤﺎﻗﻴﻪاي ﺑﻪ آن اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮد و ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ‬
.‫ﻫﻤﻮاره آﺧﺮﻳﻦ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻼك ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻧﻈﺮﻫﺎ و‬،‫از ﻛﺎرﺑﺮان اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدات اﺻﻼﺣﻲ و ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ اﻟﺤﺎﻗﻴﻪاي ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻮارد‬
‫ ﻧﻈﺮات و‬.‫ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ زﻳﺮ ارﺳﺎل ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‬،‫ﺧﺎص ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﻮدهاﻧﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدات درﻳﺎﻓﺘﻲ در ﻛﻤﻴﺘﻪﻫﺎي ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ و در‬
‫ﺻﻮرت ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺐ در ﺗﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻈﺮﻫﺎي ﺑﻌﺪي اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻨﻌﻜﺲ‬
.‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﻮﭼﻪ‬،‫ ﺧﺮدﻣﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬،‫ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎن ﻛﺮﻳﻤﺨﺎن زﻧﺪ‬،‫ ﺗﻬﺮان‬،‫اﻳﺮان‬
19 ‫ ﺷﻤﺎره‬،‫ﭼﻬﺎردﻫﻢ‬
‫اداره ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻘﺎت و اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎ‬
1585886851 : ‫ﻛﺪﭘﺴﺘﻲ‬
66153055 ‫ و‬88810459 - 60 : ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
021-88810462 : ‫دور ﻧﮕﺎر‬
:‫ﭘﺴﺖ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬
Standards@nioc.org
:‫ﺗﻌﺎرﻳﻒ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬
GENERAL DEFINITIONS:
Throughout this Standard
definitions shall apply.
the
following
:‫ﺷﺮﻛﺖ‬
COMPANY:
Refers to one of the related and/or affiliated
companies of the Iranian Ministry of Petroleum
such as National Iranian Oil Company, National
Iranian Gas Company, National Petrochemical
Company and National Iranian Oil Refinery And
Distribution Company.
‫ ﻣﺜﻞ‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ از ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻫﺎي اﺻﻠﻲ و ﻳﺎ واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ وزارت ﻧﻔﺖ‬
‫ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻠﻲ‬،‫ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻠﻲ ﮔﺎز اﻳﺮان‬،‫ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻠﻲ ﻧﻔﺖ اﻳﺮان‬
‫ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﭘﺘﺮوﺷﻴﻤﻲ و ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻠﻲ ﭘﺎﻻﻳﺶ و ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺮآوردهﻫﺎي‬
.‫ﻧﻔﺘﻲ اﺗﻼق ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
:‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪار‬
PURCHASER:
Means the "Company" where this standard is a
part of direct purchaser order by the "Company",
and the "Contractor" where this Standard is a part
of contract document.
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ "ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻲ" ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از ﻣﺪارك ﺳﻔﺎرش‬
‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ آن "ﺷﺮﻛﺖ" ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻳﺎ "ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻧﻜﺎري" ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ‬
.‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از ﻣﺪارك ﻗﺮارداد آن اﺳﺖ‬
:‫ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه و ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
VENDOR AND SUPPLIER:
Refers to firm or person who will supply and/or
fabricate the equipment or material.
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ و ﻳﺎ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات و ﻛﺎﻻﻫﺎي‬
.‫ﻣﻮرد ﻟﺰوم ﺻﻨﻌﺖ را ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
:‫ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻧﻜﺎر‬
CONTRACTOR:
Refers to the persons, firm or company whose
tender has been accepted by the company.
‫ ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ و ﻳﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدش‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ‬
.‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻨﺎﻗﺼﻪ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
:‫ﻣﺠﺮي‬
EXECUTOR:
Executor is the party which carries out all or part of
construction and/or commissioning for the project.
‫ﻣﺠﺮي ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮوﻫﻲ اﺗﻼق ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻳﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ از ﻛﺎرﻫﺎي‬
.‫اﺟﺮاﺋﻲ و ﻳﺎ راه اﻧﺪازي ﭘﺮوژه را اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﺪ‬
:‫ﺑﺎزرس‬
INSPECTOR:
The Inspector referred to in this Standard is a
person/persons or a body appointed in writing by
the company for the inspection of fabrication and
installation work
‫ﮔﺮوه ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪاي اﺗﻼق‬/‫در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﺎزرس ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮد‬
‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ و ﻧﺼﺐ‬،‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻛﺘﺒﺎً ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎرﻓﺮﻣﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ‬
.‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
:‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
SHALL:
Is used where a provision is mandatory.
.‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم آن اﺟﺒﺎري اﺳﺖ‬
:‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬
SHOULD:
Is used where a provision is advisory only.
.‫ ﺑﻜﺎر ﻣﻲرود‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ ﺿﺮورت اﻧﺠﺎم آن ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
:‫ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ‬
WILL:
Is normally used in connection with the action by
the “Company” rather than by a contractor,
supplier or vendor.
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً در ﺟﺎﻳﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم آن ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس‬
.‫ﻧﻈﺎرت ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
:‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬
MAY:
Is used where
discretionary.
.‫در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺗﻌﺎرﻳﻒ زﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ رود‬
a
provision
is
completely
.‫ ﺑﻜﺎر ﻣﻲرود‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم آن اﺧﺘﻴﺎري ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
0
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARD
FOR
CONVEYORS
FIRST REVISION
MARCH 2009
‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻛﺎﻻ و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ اول‬
1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
This Standard is the property of Iranian Ministry of
Petroleum. All rights are reserved to the owner. Neither whole
nor any part of this document may be disclosed to any third
party, reproduced, stored in any retrieval system or
transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior
written consent of the Iranian Ministry of Petroleum.
‫ ﺗﻤﺎم ﺣﻘﻮق آن ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ‬.‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ وزارت ﻧﻔﺖ اﻳﺮان اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻳﺎ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ‬،‫ﻣﺎﻟﻚ آن ﺑﻮده و ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺪون رﺿﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﺘﺒﻲ وزارت ﻧﻔﺖ اﻳﺮان‬
،‫ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل‬،‫ ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺳﺎزي‬،‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻳﺎ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ازﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺜﻴﺮ‬،‫از اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ﻳﺎ روش دﻳﮕﺮي در اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻓﺮاد ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬-0
0. INTRODUCTION
‫ﻫﺪف از اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي‬
‫ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد داراي ﭼﻬﺎر‬.‫ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﻧﻔﺖ اﺳﺖ‬
:‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺸﺮح زﻳﺮ اﺳﺖ‬
The purpose of this Standard is to establish
minimum requirements for conveyors being used
in petroleum industries. This Standard contains
four parts as follow:
‫ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻓﻮﻻدي‬: ‫ﺑﺨﺶ اول‬
Part One: Steel Non-powered Roller Conveyors
‫ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮداﻧﺪه ﺷﻮﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬: ‫ﺑﺨﺶ دوم‬
Part Two: Chain and Belt Driven live Roller
Conveyors
‫)ﻧﻮار( ﻳﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
‫ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﭽﻲ‬: ‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﺳﻮم‬
Part Three: Screw Conveyors
(‫ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺴﻤﻪ اي )ﻧﻮاري‬: ‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﭼﻬﺎرم‬
Part Four: Belt Conveyors
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ وﻳﮋه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﻪ آن‬
.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
For each Particular inquiry the requirements of the
appropriate part shall be applied.
1
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
26
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
PART ONE
‫ﺑﺨﺶ اول‬
STEEL NON-POWERED ROLLER CONVEYORS
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﻓﻮﻻدي ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
2
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
CONTENTS :
Page
No
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
: ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
1. SCOPE................................................................ 5
5 ...................................................... ‫ داﻣﻨﻪ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد‬-1
2. REFERENCES .................................................. 5
5 ............................................................. ‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ‬-2
3. UNITS................................................................. 6
6 ............................................................ ‫ واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬-3
4. DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY......... 6
6 ................................................. ‫ﺗﻌﺎرﻳﻒ و واژﮔﺎن‬-4
5. DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION................... 10
10 ................................................ ‫ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬-5
5.1 General ......................................................... 10
10 ....................................................... ‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-5
5.2 Rollers .......................................................... 10
10 ................................................... ‫ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ‬2-5
5.3 Bearings........................................................ 13
13 ................................................... ‫ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎ‬3-5
5.4 Frame Sections ............................................ 13
13 ............................................ ‫ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎي ﻗﺎب‬4-5
5.5 Guidance on Selection and Installation..... 19
19 ....................... ‫ راﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ و ﻧﺼﺐ‬5-5
5.6 Information to be Exchanged Between the
Manufacturer and the Purchaser............... 20
‫ اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه و‬6-5
20 ..................................... ‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﻣﺒﺎدﻟﻪ ﮔﺮدد‬
6. SAFETY ............................................................. 21
21 ............................................................... ‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬-6
7. INSPECTION AND TESTING........................ 21
21 .............................................. ‫ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ و آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‬-7
8. CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS............... 21
21 ............................................... ‫ ﻣﻐﺎﻳﺮت در اﺳﻨﺎد‬-8
9. PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT ................ 21
21 ......................................... ‫آﻣﺎده ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻤﻞ‬-9
10. GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY ............... 22
22 .................................................. ‫ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ و ﺗﻌﻬﺪ‬-10
APPENDICES:
:‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
APPENDIX A INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED
WITH INQUIRY OR ORDER
(see Par. 5.6) ...................................... 23
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ اﻟﻒ اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ‬
23 .. (6-5 ‫ﻳﺎ ﺳﻔﺎرش اراﺋﻪ ﺷﻮد )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻨﺪ‬
3
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
APPENDIX B INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED
BY THE MANUFACTURER
(see Clause. 5.6).............................. 24
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ب اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه‬
24 ............... (6-5 ‫اراﺋﻪ ﺷﻮد )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻨﺪ‬
APPENDIX C VENDOR DATA REQUIREMENTS
AFTER RECEIPT OF ORDER
(see Clause. 5.6)in part …………..28
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ج داده ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﭘﺲ از‬
‫درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺳﻔﺎرش اراﺋﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
28.................. 1 ‫(در ﺑﺨﺶ‬6-5‫)ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻨﺪ‬
4
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ داﻣﻨﻪ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد‬-1
1. SCOPE
‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت اﺑﻌﺎدي اﺻﻠﻲ و‬
‫اﻧﻮاع ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻗﺎب ﻫﺎي ﺛﺎﺑﺖ و ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ "ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻓﻮﻻدي" ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در ﺧﺪﻣﺎت‬
‫ ﮔﺎز و ﭘﺘﺮوﺷﻴﻤﻲ را ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‬،‫ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﺠﺎت ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ‬،‫ﭘﺎﻻﻳﺸﮕﺎﻫﻲ‬
.‫ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﻧﻮع دﻗﻴﻖ ﻳﺎ وﻳﮋه‬
‫ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬.‫ﻣﻨﻈﻮرﻫﺎي ﺧﺎص ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻧﻤﻲ رود‬
‫ وي را از‬،‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪي ﺧﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﻪ‬،‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ و ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎت آن ﺑﺎ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻃﻮري ﻛﻪ از ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺎي اﺟﺮاﻳﻲ ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد را در‬
.‫ ﻣﺒﺮي ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬،‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه ﭘﺎﺳﺨﮕﻮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
This Standard covers general requirements
including the main dimensional details and normal
types of frame construction of fixed and portable
"Steel Non-Powered Roller Conveyors" for use in
refinery services, chemical, gas and petrochemical
plants.
This Standard does not apply to precision or
special purpose type of roller conveyors.
Compliance by the conveyor manufacturer with
the provisions of this Standard does not relieve
him of the responsibility of furnishing conveyor
and accessories of proper design, mechanically
suited to meet guarantees at the specified service
conditions.
No deviations or exceptions from this Standard
shall be permitted without the prior written
approval of the purchaser.
‫ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ اﻧﺤﺮاف ﻳﺎ اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء از اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﺪون ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﺘﺒﻲ‬
.‫ﻗﺒﻠﻲ از ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﻣﺠﺎز ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Intended deviations shall be separately listed by
the Vendor and supported by reasons thereof for
purchaser consideration.
‫اﻧﺤﺮاف ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ دﻻﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ و رﺳﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه‬
.‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ و ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﻮد‬
:1 ‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note 1:
‫ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺎزﻧﮕﺮي ﺷﺪه اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻓﻮق‬،‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد دو زﺑﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺘﻪ ﻓﻨﻲ‬1388 ‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ در ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ ﻣﺎه ﺳﺎل‬
‫ از اﻳﻦ‬.‫( اراﻳﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮدد‬1) ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ‬
.‫( اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻨﺴﻮخ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬0) ‫ﭘﺲ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ‬
This bilingual standard is a revised version of the
standard specification by the relevant technical
committee on March 2009, which is issued as
revision (1). Revision (0) of the said standard
specification is withdrawn.
:2 ‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note 2:
‫ ﻣﺘﻦ اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‬،‫در ﺻﻮرت اﺧﺘﻼف ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ و اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‬
.‫ﻣﻼك ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
In case of conflict between Farsi and English
languages, English language shall govern.
‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ‬-2
2. REFERENCES
‫در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﻪ آﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ و اﺳـﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﺗـﺎرﻳﺦ دار و‬
‫ ﺗـﺎ ﺣـﺪي ﻛـﻪ در‬،‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ‬.‫ﺑﺪون ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ زﻳﺮ اﺷﺎره ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺨـﺸﻲ از اﻳـﻦ‬،‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣـﻮرد اﺳـﺘﻔﺎده ﻗـﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘـﻪاﻧـﺪ‬
‫ وﻳـﺮاﻳﺶ‬،‫ در ﻣﺮاﺟـﻊ ﺗـﺎرﻳﺦ دار‬.‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﺤﺴﻮب ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﻣﻼك ﺑﻮده و ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮاﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺗـﺎرﻳﺦ وﻳـﺮاﻳﺶ در‬
‫ ﭘﺲ از ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎرﻓﺮﻣﺎ و ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬،‫آﻧﻬﺎ داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ آﺧﺮﻳﻦ وﻳـﺮاﻳﺶ آﻧﻬـﺎ ﺑـﻪ‬،‫ در ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ ﺑﺪون ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬.‫اﺟﺮا ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫اﻧﻀﻤﺎم ﻛﻠﻴﻪ اﺻﻼﺣﺎت و ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖﻫﺎي آن ﻣﻼك ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
Throughout this Standard the following dated and
undated standards/codes are referred to. These
referenced documents shall, to the extent specified
herein, form a part of this standard. For dated
references, the edition cited applies. The
applicability of changes in dated references that
occur after the cited date shall be mutually agreed
upon by the company and the vendor. For undated
references, the latest edition of the referenced
documents (including any supplements and
amendments) applies.
ASME
B 20.1
(‫ )اﻧﺠﻤﻦ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﺎن ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻚ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬ASME
(AMERICAN
SOCIETY
OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERS)
"Safety
Standard
‫"اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻘﺎﻟـﻪ ﻫـﺎ و‬
for
5
B 20.1
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
Conveyors
Equipment"
and
Related
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
"‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺮﺑﻮط‬
(‫ )اﻧﺠﻤﻦ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻧﻮار ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬CEMA
CEMA (CONVEYORS
EQUIPMENT
MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION)
102
"Conveyor Terms and
Definitions"
"‫"ﺗﻌﺎرﻳﻒ و اﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎت ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬
102
401
"Roller Conveyors NonPowered"
"‫"ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﻏﻴﺮﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
401
(‫ ) اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻧﻔﺖ اﻳﺮان‬IPS
IPS (IRANIAN PETROLEUM STANDARDS)
IPS-E-GN-100 "Engineering
Units"
Standard
‫ﺑﺮاي‬
for
‫ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ‬
‫"اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
"‫واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬
IPS-E-GN-100
‫ واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬-3
3. UNITS
،(SI) ‫ ﺑﺮﻣﺒﻨﺎي ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬،‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ ﻣﮕﺮ آﻧﻜﻪ در‬،‫ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬IPS-E-GN-100 ‫ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ﻣﺘﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﻪ واﺣﺪ دﻳﮕﺮي اﺷﺎره ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
This Standard is based on International System of
Units (SI) as per IPS-E-GN-100, except where
otherwise specified.
‫ﺗﻌﺎرﻳﻒ و واژﮔﺎن‬-4
4. DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY
.‫ﺗﻌﺎرﻳﻒ زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﻜﺎر روﻧﺪ‬
For the purposes of this Standard the following
definitions shall apply:
‫ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ‬1-4
4.1 Roller Conveyor
‫ﺳﺮي ﻏﻠﺘﻚﻫﺎي ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه در ﻗﺎﺑﻲ ﻛﻪ روي آن اﺷﻴﺎء ﺑﻪ‬
.‫ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮاﻧﺸﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺮو ﭘﻴﺶ راﻧﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬،‫ﺻﻮرت دﺳﺘﻲ‬
A series of rollers supported in a frame over
which objects are advanced manually, by gravity
or by power
(‫ ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻗﺎب )آﻟﺖ ﻫﺎي اﻓﻘﻲ ﻗﺎب‬2-4
4.2 Frame Rails
‫اﻋﻀﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ اﺟﺰاء ﻧﻘﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ را‬
.‫ﻧﮕﻪ ﻣﻲدارﻧﺪ‬
Members which support the conveying
component of non-powered or powered conveyors
‫ ﺣﻔﺎظﻫﺎ‬3-4
4.3 Guards
‫ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬،‫اﺟﺰاﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺤﺪود ﻛﺮدن ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫ اﮔﺮ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ در‬.‫ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻗﺎب ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪهاﻧﺪ‬،‫ﻫﺪاﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫ ﻗﺎب ﺑﻌﻨﻮان ﺣﻔﺎظ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ‬،‫ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﺮد‬
Members attached to frame rails to form a guide
to restrict the lateral movement of the package.
With rollers set low, the frame acts as the guard.
‫ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ‬4-4
4.4 Roller
‫ ﻧﻤﺎي‬.‫ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻣﺪوري اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ آن آزاد ﻣﻲ ﭼﺮﺧﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﺎو‬،‫ ﺳﺮﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪه‬،‫ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ آن ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺻﺎف ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎرﻳﻚ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه‬
‫ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬.‫ دﻧﺪهدار ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺎرهدار ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ ﻣﻮﺟﺪار‬،‫ﻳﺎ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ دار‬
.‫اﺳﺖ داراي ﻣﺤﻮر ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
A round part free to revolve its outer surface, the
face may be straight or tapered, covered, concave
or flanged, corrugated, ribbed or fluted. Rollers
may have live axle (shaft) or dead axle
construction.
‫ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن‬5-4
4.5 Bearing
،‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬،‫ﻗﻄﻌﻪاي اﺳﺖ از دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮﻣﺤﻮر‬
A machine part in or on which a journal, shaft,
6
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
axle, pin or other parts rotates, oscillates or slides.
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ ﻧﻮﺳﺎن‬،‫ ﺧﺎر ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت دﻳﮕﺮ درون آن ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ آن ﻣﻲ ﭼﺮﺧﺪ‬،‫ﻣﺤﻮر‬
.‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻟﻐﺰد‬
(‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺤﻮر )ﻣﻴﻠﻪ‬6-4
4.6 Shaft
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻪاي اﺳﺖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻓﻮﻻدي و ﻣﺪور ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻗﻄﻌﺎت‬
.‫ﭼﺮﺧﻨﺪه ﻳﺎ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻧﻴﺮو ﺑﻜﺎر ﻣﻲ رود‬
A bar, usually of steel and usually round to
support rotating parts or to transmit power
(‫ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ )ﺟﻔﺖ ﻛﻦﻫﺎ‬7-4
4.7 Couplings
‫اﺟﺰاﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻬﻢ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ و اﻳﺠﺎد ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬
.‫ﻳﻜﭙﺎرﭼﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ روﻧﺪ‬
Members used to join conveyor sections to make
an integral conveyor.
‫ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎ‬8-4
4.8 Supports
‫آراﻳﺶ اﺟﺰاﻳﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﻧﮕﻬﺪاﺷﺘﻦ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻳﺎ‬
‫ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬.‫ﻫﻤﺮاﺳﺘﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﻜﺎر ﻣﻲرود‬
‫ اﻋﻀﺎء ﻓﺸﺎري ﻳﺎ دﺳﺘﻚﻫﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻨﺪ‬،‫آوﻳﺰﻫﺎ‬
.‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
Arrangement of members used to maintain the
elevation or alignment of the conveyor. Supports
can take the form of hangers, compression
members, or brackets, and can be either stationary
or portable.
(‫ ﻋﺮض )ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬9-4
4.9 Width
‫ در ﺷﺮاﻳﻄﻲ ﻛﻪ‬.‫اﻧﺪازه درون ﺑﻪ درون ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻗﺎب ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﺎظ ﻫﺎ ﻋﺮض‬،‫ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﺣﻔﺎظ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ را ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
The dimension inside to inside of the conveyor
frame rails. When auxiliary guards are required,
the distance between the guards should be
specified.
‫ درﺟﻪ ﺷﻴﺐ‬10-4
4.10 Grade
‫ درﺻﺪ‬:‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﺷﻴﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮاﺷﻴﺒﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ اﻓﻖ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ درﺟﻪ‬
‫ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺰ ﻋﻤﻮدي ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬،‫ﺧﻴﺰ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ اﻓﻘﻲ‬
.‫در ﻫﺮ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ اﻓﻘﻲ آن‬
The rate of incline or decline in terms of degrees
from the horizontal: percent of rise to the
horizontal distance, or millimeters of vertical rise
per meter of horizontal projection.
‫ ﻗﻮس ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ‬11-4
4.11 Roller Conveyor Curve
‫ ﺷﻌﺎع ﻗﻮس از ﻧﻤﺎي‬.‫ﺑﺨﺶ داﻳﺮهاي ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮدش ﻗﻮس‬.‫دروﻧﻲ ﻗﻴﺪ دروﻧﻲ ﻗﺎب اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
‫در ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻢ راﺳﺘﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﮕﺎه‬
.(1-1 ‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
:‫ﻗﻮس ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ داراي‬
A circular section of roller conveyor. The curve
radius is measured to the inside face of the inside
frame rail. The hand of a curve is determined
when facing in the direction of package travel (see
Fig.1.1).
Curves may have either:
‫اﻟﻒ( ﻏﻠﺘﻚﻫﺎي ﺑﺎ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺻﺎف ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
a) Straight face rollers (see Fig. 1.2)
.(2-1
.(3-1 ‫ب( ﻏﻠﺘﻚﻫﺎي اﻓﺘﺮاﻗﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ )ﻧﮕﺎه ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
b) Differential rollers (see Fig. 1.3)
‫ج( ﻏﻠﺘﻚﻫﺎي ﺑﺎرﻳﻚ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
c) Tapered rollers (see Fig. 1.4)
.(4-1
(‫ ﮔﺎم )ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ‬12-4
4.12 Roller Centers (Pitch)
‫ ﮔﺎم‬،‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻗﻮس ﻫﺎ‬،‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻤﺠﻮار‬
‫)ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ( در ﺷﻌﺎع دروﻧﻲ ﻗﻮس اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي‬
.‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
Distance between center lines of adjacent rollers.
For curves, roller centers are measured at the
inside radius.
7
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ ﻣﺤﻮر‬13-4
4.13 Axle
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﻨﺪه ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮﭼﺮﺧﻨﺪهاي اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ‬
(‫ ﮔﺮداﻧﺪه ﺷﺪه ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه )ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ‬، ‫ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎي ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه‬
.‫روي آن ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‬
A shaft, either rotating or non-rotating, on which
are mounted drive, driven, or supporting wheels
or rollers
‫ ﺑﺨﺶ راﺳﺖ‬14-4
4.14 Straight Section
‫ ﻣﻬﺎري ﻫﺎي ﺿﺮﺑﺪري و‬،‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ اي ﻣﺘﺸﻜﻞ از ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻗﺎب‬
‫ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ در ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎ‬.‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
An assembly of frame rails, cross-tie members
and rollers.
Rollers may be set high or low in frame rails.
‫ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ )ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه( ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎ‬15-4
4.15 Rated Life of Bearings
‫ درﺻﺪ‬90 ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺳﺎﻋﺎت ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ در ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﮔﺮوه ﻇﺎﻫﺮاً ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﻲ از ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﭼﻤﻪاي ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ اوﻟﻴﻪ اي از ﺧﺴﺘﮕﻲ در آﻧﻬﺎ اﻳﺠﺎد ﺷﻮد ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ درﺻﺪ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎ ﻛﺎر ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ‬50 ‫ﻛﻪ در آن‬،"‫"ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ‬
.‫ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﭘﻨﺞ ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ "ﻋﻤﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ" اﺳﺖ‬،‫ﻛﺮد‬
The minimum number of hours at a given speed
that 90% of a group of apparently identical ball
bearings will function before the first evidence of
fatigue develops. The "average life", which 50%
of the bearings will function, will be
approximately five times the "rated life"
‫ ﻧﻤﺎدﻫﺎ‬16-4
4.16 Symbols
:‫در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻧﻤﺎدﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
In this Standard the following symbols are used:
d 1 diameter of roller
‫ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ‬d 1
d 2 diameter of shaft
(‫ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺤﻮر )ﻣﻴﻠﻪ‬d 2
H height of roller track section
‫ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺑﺨﺶ ﺳﺎزه ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ‬H
l length of roller: nominal width of
conveyor
‫ ﻋﺮض اﺳﻤﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬:‫ﻃﻮل ﻏﻠﺘﻚ‬
l
‫ ﻃﻮل ﻗﺎب‬L
L length of frame
P
pitch of rollers
(‫ ﮔﺎم ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ )ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ‬P
r
radius of curve
‫ ﺷﻌﺎع ﻗﻮس‬r
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻌﺎرﻳﻒ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي‬
. ANSI/CEMA 401 ‫ و‬ANSI/CEMA 102
For more definitions refer to ANSI/CEMA 102
and ANSI/CEMA 401
8
‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ ‪Mar. 2009/ 1388‬‬
‫)‪IPS-M-GN-210(1‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ = درون ﺗﺎ درون ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻮس ﭼﭗ ﮔﺮد‬
‫ﻗﻮس راﺳﺖ ﮔﺮد‬
‫‪Fig. 1.1‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪1-1‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﺑﺮ روي ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪون ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻳﻚ در ﻣﻴﺎن‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚﻫﺎي ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎي راﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚﻫﺎي اﻓﺘﺮاﻗﻲ‬
‫‪STRAIGHT FACE ROLLERS‬‬
‫‪DIFFERENTIAL ROLLERS‬‬
‫‪Fig. 1.2‬‬
‫‪Fig. 1.3‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪3-1‬‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪2-1‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
29
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
TAPERED ROLLERS
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎرﻳﻚ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه‬
Fig. 1.4
4-1 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬-5
5. DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-5
5.1 General
‫اﺟﺰاء ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﻓﻮﻻدي و ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺳﻮار‬
، 5-1 ‫ﺷﺪه آﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎم و ﻧﺸﺎن ﻫﺎي آﻧﻬﺎ در ﺷﻜﻞ ﻫﺎي‬
.‫ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬7-1 ‫ و‬6-1
‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬،‫ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ذﻛﺮ ﺷﺪه در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت اﺳﺎﺳﻲ در ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
ANSI/CEMA401 ‫ﺑﺮﻗﻲ و اﺟﺰاء ﻣﺮﺑﻮط آﻧﻬﺎ ﻃﺒﻖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Typical components of steel roller conveyors and
their assemblies are illustrated, together with their
designations, in Figs.1.5, 1.6 and 1.7.
In addition to the requirements of this Standard,
basic considerations in design and selection of
non-powered roller conveyors and components,
should be in accordance with ANSI / CEMA 401
‫ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ‬2-5
5.2 Rollers
‫ ﻣﻮاد‬1-2-5
5.2.1 Materials
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺮم)ﻧﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎي( ﻓﻮﻻدي ﻳﺎ ﺟﻮش‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ و ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺤﻮرﻫﺎي آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻓﻮﻻد ﻧﺮم ﺑﺮاق‬
.‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
Rollers shall be made of electric resistance welded
(ERW) steel tube and shafts of bright mild steel.
‫ اﺑﻌﺎد‬2-2-5
5.2.2 Dimensions
‫ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬.‫ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﺷﻮد‬1-1 ‫ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻚﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺟﺪول‬
-1 ‫ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻧﺮم )ﻧﺎﻳﻪ( ﻏﻠﺘﻚ و اﺑﻌﺎد ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺪول‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬1
.‫ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﺷﻮد‬2-1 ‫ﻃﻮل ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺟﺪول‬
Roller diameters shall be selected from Table 1.1.
The thickness of roller tubing and the dimensions
of shafts shall conform to Table 1.1. Roller
lengths shall be selected from Table 1.2.
10
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
30
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
TABLE 1.1 - ROLLER DIAMETERS AND SHAFT DIMENSIONS
‫ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ و اﺑﻌﺎد ﻣﻴﻠﻪ‬1-1 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
ROLLER
DIAMETER
(d 1 )
50
‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ‬
THICKNESS OF
ROLLER TUBING
(‫ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻧﺮم)ﻧﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ‬
HEXAGON SHAFT
ACROSS FLATS
DIAMETER OF
ROUND SHAFT
(d 2 )
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﺳﻄﻮح ﺗﺨﺖ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﮔﺮد‬
‫ﺷﺶ ﺳﻮ‬
mm
mm
mm
mm
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
25.4
1.2
6.5
---
38.0
1.2
10.0
9.5
51.0
1.6
10.0
57.0
1.6
10.0
63.5
3.2
76.1
3.2
88.9
5.4
31
mm
300
16.0
20.0
16.0
20.0
22.0
15.0
17.5
25.0
25.0
TABLE 1.2 - LENGTHS OF ROLLERS (ℓ)*
*
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
9.5
12.0
9.5
12.0
350
(ℓ) ‫ ﻃﻮل ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ‬2-1 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
400
450
600
750
900
‫ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪه ﻋﺮض اﺳﻤﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬ℓ ‫* اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي‬
* The Values ℓ also Denotes the Nominal Width
of Conveyor.
.‫اﺳﺖ‬
(‫ ﮔﺎم ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ )ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ‬3-2-5
5.2.3 Pitch of rollers (roller centers)
‫( ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪه‬P) "‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﻨﻮان "ﮔﺎم‬
‫ ﮔﺎم ﺑﺮ روي ﺧﻂ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻗﻮس ﻫﺎ ﺿﺮورﺗﺎً ﺑﺎ ﮔﺎم در ﺑﺨﺶ‬.‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﮔﺎم‬،‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻗﻮس ﻫﺎ‬.‫راﺳﺖ ﺳﺎزه ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎور ﻳﻜﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫)ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ( در ﺷﻌﺎع داﺧﻠﻲ ﻗﻮس اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﮔﺎم ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺮ روي ﺑﺨﺶ راﺳﺖ ﺳﺎزه ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ ﮔﺎم ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس‬.‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺑﻜﺎر رﻓﺘﻪ دارد‬
.‫ آورده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬3-1 ‫ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد آﻧﻬﺎ در ﺟﺪول‬
The distance between centers of rollers is defined
as "pitch" (P). The pitch on the centerline of bends
is not necessarily the same as that of the adjacent
straight track. For curves, the pitch (roller centers)
are measured at the inside radius.
The minimum pitch on straight track depends on
the diameter of roller employed. Pitches available,
according to applications, are as in Table 1.3.
11
‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ ‪Mar. 2009/ 1388‬‬
‫)‪IPS-M-GN-210(1‬‬
‫)‪TABLE 1.3 - PITCHES OF ROLLERS (P‬‬
‫ﺟﺪول ‪ 3-1‬ﮔﺎم ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ ) ‪(P‬‬
‫‪200‬‬
‫‪150‬‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪ 4-2-5‬ﺳﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪي‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪37.5‬‬
‫‪mm‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫‪5.2.4 Assembly‬‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ در ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎي راﺳﺖ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻮازي‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﻮاردي ﻛﻪ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﮕﻮﻧﻪ اي اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه اﻧﺪ و اﻳﻦ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ در ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‪،‬‬
‫وﺳﺎﺋﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ از ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪For straight sections of conveyor, rollers shall be‬‬
‫‪parallel to each other. Means shall be provided to‬‬
‫‪prevent rotation of all roller shafts except where‬‬
‫‪the design provides for rotating shafts secured in‬‬
‫‪the rollers.‬‬
‫‪ 5-2-5‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪5.2.5 Roller spacing‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد دﺳﺖ ﻛﻢ ﺳﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ در زﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻴﺌﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ در ﺣﺎل ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﺪن اﺳﺖ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‪ .‬اﮔﺮ وزن درون ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮر ﻳﻜﻨﻮاﺧﺖ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﻧﺸﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶﺑﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎي ﻻزم در ﻣﻮرد ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ اﻧﺠﺎم‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮد‪.‬‬
‫‪At least three rollers should be under the package,‬‬
‫‪commodity or object being handled. If the weight‬‬
‫‪within the package is not uniformly distributed,‬‬
‫‪special consideration should be given to the roller‬‬
‫‪centers.‬‬
‫‪ 6-2-5‬درﺟﻪ ﺷﻴﺐ‬
‫‪5.2.6 Grade‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎي داراي اﻧﺪازه و وزن اﺳﻤﻲ‬
‫را ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺷﻴﺐ ‪ 42‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ در ﻣﺘﺮ دارد‪،‬‬
‫وﻟﻲ اﻳﻦ درﺟﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﻮار ﺷﺪن‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺣﻤﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه و وزن آﻧﻬﺎ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬در‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ ﭘﺲ از ﻳﻚ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ‬
‫)ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺳﺎزي( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﻜﻮن آﻏﺎز ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻫﺎي وﻳﮋه اي در‬
‫ﻣﻮرد درﺟﻪ ﺷﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ و ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎب‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﮔﻴﺮد‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺷﻴﺐ دار ﺑﺮاي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪﻫﺎي ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺪود ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮل ﻫﺎي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻮﺗﺎه‬
‫ﮔﺮدد‪ ،‬در ﻏﻴﺮ اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در اﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ از وﺳﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد از ﻃﻮلﻫﺎي‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻲ و ﺷﻴﺐﻫﺎي ﺑﺪون ﺑﺮﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ در ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﺸﻮد‪ .‬در ﻏﻴﺮ اﻳﻨﺼﻮرت ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫دﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺧﻮرد ﻛﺮده و ﻗﻄﺎري از ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ را ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪The average Roller Conveyor, handling packages‬‬
‫‪of a nominal size and weight, requires a grade of‬‬
‫‪42 mm per meter but this will increase or decrease‬‬
‫‪according to the riding surface of the packages‬‬
‫‪conveyed and their weight. On roller Conveyor‬‬
‫‪sections where packages must start from rest after‬‬
‫‪a lengthy dwell (such as storage systems) special‬‬
‫‪consideration should be given to grade, roller‬‬
‫‪centers and frame deflection.‬‬
‫‪The use of graded Roller Conveyor for handling‬‬
‫‪heavy packages must be limited to short runs,‬‬
‫‪otherwise brakes or other speed control devices‬‬
‫‪must be added. Long unbroken runs of graded‬‬
‫‪Roller Conveyor should be avoided where it is‬‬
‫‪possible for one package to catch up with another‬‬
‫‪and form a train.‬‬
‫‪ 7-2-5‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ‬
‫‪5.2.7 Roller selection‬‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ‪ 51‬و ‪ 63/5‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ و ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺟﺪاره ‪ 1/6‬و ‪ 3/2‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺘﺪاول ﺗﺮﻳﻦ اﻧﺪازهﻫﺎي ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪Rollers of approximately 51 and 63.5 mm,‬‬
‫‪diameter 1.6 and 3.2 mm, wall thickness are the‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
most popular sizes, in line with general utility and
cost. Smaller diameter rollers are used when close
spacing is required. Larger diameter rollers are for
heavy duty handling.
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ در ﻣﻮاردي ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬.‫ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬،‫ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ و ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎت ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬،‫ﺑﻨﺪي ﻛﻤﺘﺮي ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻏﻠﺘﻚﻫﺎي ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي‬.‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻳﺶ ﻻزم ﻏﻠﺘﻚﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺮدن وزن ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪاد‬
‫ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن و‬،‫ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ‬.‫ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ آﻳﺪ‬،‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس آﺧﺮﻳﻦ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد در اﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﺑﻪ‬.‫ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﺷﻮد‬CEMA 401
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ رواداري ﻫﺎي ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪي در‬
‫ ﻫﻤﻪ‬،‫ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎ و ﻏﻴﺮه‬،‫ ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻗﺎب‬،(‫ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺮم)ﻧﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
.‫اﻧﻮاع ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
The required roller capacity is obtained by
dividing the weight of the package by the number
of rollers under the package. Roller, bearing and
shaft combination of adequate capacity shall be
selected according to CEMA Standard-401 Latest
Edition. This selection should take into
consideration that not all rollers are effective, due
to manufacturing tolerances on tubing, frame rails,
bearings, etc.
‫ﻃﻮل ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﻋﺮض ﻛﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ‬76 ‫ ﻳﺎ‬51 ‫ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻏﻠﺘﻚﻫﺎي‬.‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﮕﺮدد‬
‫ و ﺣﺘﻲ در ﻣﻮاردي ﻛﻪ‬،‫ﺗﺮ از ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ داراي ﻗﻮس ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺎز ﻫﻢ ﻋﺮﻳﺾﺗﺮ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺣﺎﻻت ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺮاﺗﺮ از اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ اداﻣﻪ ﭘﻴﺪا‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
The length of the roller will vary according to the
width of commodity conveyed. Ordinarily rollers
are made 51 or 76 mm, longer than the widest
package, and even more where curves are
involved. In some cases packages extend beyond
the end of the rollers.
‫ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎ‬3-5
5.3 Bearings
،‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ را ﻣﻴﺘﻮان ﺑﺎ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎي اﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺮد‬
(‫ﻣﺘﺪاوﻟﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎنﻫﺎي ﻣﻮرد ﻣﺼﺮف ﺳﺎﭼﻤﻪروﻫﺎي )ﺑﻲ ﺣﻔﺎظ‬
‫ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻮع آﻧﻬﺎ داراي ﻛﺎﺳﻪ ﻧﻤﺪ‬،‫ﻏﻴﺮ دﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫( ورق ﻫﺎي ﻣﻨﮕﻨﻪ ﺷﺪه‬1) ‫ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎي اﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ از‬.‫ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲاﻧﺪ‬
‫( ورق ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﻧﮕﻬﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه در ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪﻫﺎي ﺑﺎ‬2)
‫( ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻜﺎري ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻮﭘﺮ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ‬3) ‫ورق ﻣﻨﮕﻨﻪ ﺷﺪه ﻳﺎ‬
‫ اﺟﺰاء اﻳﻦ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎ در ﺻﻮرت ﻟﺰوم ﺳﺨﺖ ﮔﺮداﻧﻲ‬.‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ در‬،‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﮔﺮﭼﻪ اﻛﺜﺮ آﻧﻬﺎ داراي ﭘﺮداﺧﺖ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎر دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﻳﺠﺎب ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮان آﻧﻬﺎ را در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ‬
.‫ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻛﺮد‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي‬،‫ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ روش ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻲ داﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
:‫اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ روش زﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
Rollers can be fitted with a variety of end
bearings; the most commonly used being nonprecision (uncaged) ballraces, several types of
which include external seals. Other end bearings
incorporate oil impregnated or nylon bushes. End
bearings are constructed from (1) pressed plates,
(2) machined plates retained in pressed plate
enclosures, or (3) solid bar machinings.
Components are hardened where necessary and
although the majority have a natural finish. Anticorrosion protection can be applied where the
duty warrants this.
Bearings shall be positively located into tubes,
one or more of the following methods being
recommended:
‫( ﭼﻴﻦ و ﺷﻜﻦ دار ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺘﻘﺎرن‬1
1) Synchronized dimpling;
‫( ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري‬2
2) Welding;
‫( ﭼﻜﺶ ﻛﺎري ﻳﺎ آﻫﻨﮕﺮي ﺳﺮد‬3
3) Peening or swaging (tube closure over
bearing).
5.4 Frame Sections
‫ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎي ﻗﺎب‬4-5
5.4.1 Frame rails
‫ ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻗﺎب‬1-4-5
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً داراي ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن دو ﻗﻴﺪي ﺗﻚ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ‬
Roller conveyor is normally two-rail, single-roller
construction. However, multiple rail and roller
13
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
combinations may be used to advantage on certain
applications. The actual frame selection is
generally determined by one or more of the
following:
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺎي ﭼﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺪي و ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬،‫ ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﺣﺎل‬.‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫اﺳﺖ ﺑﻌﻠﺖ ﻣﺰاﻳﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ دارﻧﺪ در ﻛﺎرﺑﺮدﻫﺎي ﺧﺎص اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻗﺎب ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎً ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬.‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﻧﺎﻣﺒﺮده در زﻳﺮ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
a) Actual loading on conveyor where stresses
and deflection in frame members become a
determining factor.
‫اﻟﻒ( ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري واﻗﻌﻲ ﺑﺮ روي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ در ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻫﺎ و‬
b) The nature of the commodity being handled
and how the conveyor is being used.
‫ب( ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﻛﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
.‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻫﺎ در اﻋﻀﺎء ﻗﺎب ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
.‫از ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬
c) What is now used for similar application.
.‫ج( آﻧﭽﻪ در ﺣﺎل ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﻜﺎر ﻣﻴﺮود‬
Frames shall be of rigid construction to ensure
permanent alignment of rollers and of sufficient
strength to ensure that deflection under load
between stands does not affect adversely the
distribution of the load over the rollers or the
efficient working of the conveyor. Typical
arrangements of frame members are shown in Fig.
1.5. Coupling shall be by means of hooks or joint
plates.
‫ﻗﺎب ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن از ﻫﻢ راﺳﺘﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﮔﺎر ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ‬
‫داراي ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن ﺻﻠﺐ ﺑﻮده و ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺎر وارده در ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻜﻮس را ﺑﺮ‬
‫ داراي‬،‫ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﺑﺎر ﺑﺮ روي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎر ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﺬارد‬
‫ آراﻳﺶ ﻫﺎي ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ اي از اﻋﻀﺎء ﻗﺎب ﻫﺎ‬.‫اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬.‫ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬5-1 ‫در ﺷﻜﻞ‬
.‫ﻗﻼب ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ورﻗﻪ ﻫﺎي اﺗﺼﺎل اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫ اﺑﻌﺎد‬2-4-5
5.4.2 Dimensions
‫ ﻣﺘﺮ‬3/0 ‫ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ‬2/5 (L) ‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎي ﻗﺎب ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً در ﻃﻮل ﻫﺎي‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ; ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮل ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻫﺘﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫( از ﺑﺎﻻي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﺗﺎ‬H) ‫ ارﺗﻔﺎع‬.‫در ﺻﻮرت ﻧﻴﺎز اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫زﻳﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻗﺎب ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻗﺎب ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
Frame sections are normally manufactured in 2.5
m or 3.0 m lengths (L); make-up sections of
shorter length are also employed where necessary.
The height (H) from top of roller to underside of
roller frame varies according to the design of
frame.
‫ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎ‬3-4-5
5.4.3 Supports
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن و ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﺑﻨﺪي ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬
.‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
The construction and spacing of supports must
conform to loading on conveyor.
‫ ﻗﻮس ﻫﺎي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ‬4-4-5
5.4.4 Roller conveyor curves
Roller conveyor curves are made to match any
type of straight conveyor. The radius of any curve
is dependent upon the length and width of the
package which is to be conveyed.
‫ﻗﻮس ﻫﺎي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﻃﻮري ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮع‬
‫ ﺷﻌﺎع ﻫﺮ ﻗﻮس واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮل‬.‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ راﺳﺖ ﺟﻔﺖ و ﺟﻮر ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫و ﻋﺮض ﺑﺴﺘﻪ اي دارد ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
Typical types of curved track are illustrated in
Fig. 1.7. They are available in multiples of 30°,
45°, 60° and 90°. The overall lengths of rollers
shall be selected from Table 1.2.
‫ ﻧﺸﺎن‬7-1 ‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ اﻧﻮاع ﺳﺎزه ﻫﺎي ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻗﻮﺳﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ در ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ و‬60° ،45° ،30° ‫ اﻳﻦ ﺳﺎزه ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ زاوﻳﻪ‬.‫داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻃﻮل ﻫﺎي ﻛﻠﻲ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺟﺪول‬.‫ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬90°
.‫ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬2-1
‫ﮔﺎم ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ در ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎي ﻗﻮﺳﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر و‬
.‫ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد آن درﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ دارد‬
The pitch of rollers on curved sections depends
upon the duty and application of the plant.
‫( ﻗﻮس ﺗﺎ ﻧﻤﺎي داﺧﻠﻲ ﻗﻴﺪ دروﻧﻲ ﻗﺎب اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي‬r) ‫ﺷﻌﺎع‬
‫ در‬،‫ و ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬،(7-1 ‫ )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬.‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
The radius (r) of the curve is measured to the
inside face of the inner frame rail (see Fig. 1.7),
and it is recommended that, where parallel tube
14
‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ ‪Mar. 2009/ 1388‬‬
‫)‪IPS-M-GN-210(1‬‬
‫‪rollers are used, values for r be selected from‬‬
‫‪Table 1.4.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮاردي ﻛﻪ از ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اي ﻣﻮازي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي )‪ (r‬ارﻗﺎم از ﺟﺪول ‪ 4-1‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫)‪TABLE 1.4 - RADII OF CURVED TRACKS (USING PARALLEL TUBE ROLLERS‬‬
‫ﺟﺪول ‪ 4-1‬ﺷﻌﺎع ﺳﺎزه ﻫﺎي ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻗﻮﺳﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ )ﻛﻪ در آﻧﻬﺎ از ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اي ﻣﻮازي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ(‬
‫‪RADIUS OF CURVE‬‬
‫‪ROLLER DIAMETER‬‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎع ﻗﻮس‬
‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫)‪(r‬‬
‫‪mm‬‬
‫‪51‬‬
‫) ‪(d 1‬‬
‫‪mm‬‬
‫‪630‬‬
‫‪800‬‬
‫‪630‬‬
‫‪800‬‬
‫‪800‬‬
‫‪1000‬‬
‫‪800‬‬
‫‪1000‬‬
‫‪800‬‬
‫‪1000‬‬
‫‪800‬‬
‫‪1000‬‬
‫‪25.4‬‬
‫‪38.0‬‬
‫‪51.0‬‬
‫‪57.0‬‬
‫‪63.5‬‬
‫‪76.1‬‬
‫‪88.9‬‬
‫‪1250‬‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘــﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻮﻟـــﻪ اي ﺑــﺎرﻳﻚ ﺷــﻮﻧﺪه ﺑـــﺎ ﻗﻄـــﺮﻫﺎي‬
‫‪ 38‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ × ‪ 57‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬و ﺷﻌﺎع ﻫﺎي)‪(r‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺎزه ﻫﺎي ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻗﻮﺳﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 800‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ و‬
‫‪ 1000‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Taper tube rollers 38 mm × 57 mm diameters are‬‬
‫‪available, and corresponding recommended‬‬
‫‪curved track radii (r) are 800 mm and 1000 mm.‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫)‪IPS-M-GN-210(1‬‬
‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ ‪Mar. 2009/ 1388‬‬
‫‪ℓ 1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻃﻮل ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ ‪ℓ‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ‪ ، d 1‬ﺳﺒﻚ ﻗﺎب ‪W‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ‪d 2‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﻚ ‪V‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻧﺒﺸﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﻚ ‪X‬‬
‫‪ -6‬ﻧﺒﺸﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﻚ ‪Y‬‬
‫‪ -7‬ﻧﺎوداﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﻚ ‪Z‬‬
‫‪Fig. 1.5-TYPICAL ARRANGEMENTS OF FRAME MEMBERS‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 5-1‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ آراﻳﺶ ﻫﺎي اﺟﺰاء ﻗﺎب‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪32‬‬
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
L ‫ﻃﻮل ﻗﺎب‬
33
Fig. 1.6-TYPICAL ROLLER FRAME: STRAIGHT SECTIONS
‫ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎي راﺳﺖ‬: ‫ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻗﺎب ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ‬6-1 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
17
‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ ‪Mar. 2009/ 1388‬‬
‫)‪IPS-M-GN-210(1‬‬
‫‪ℓ‬‬
‫‪ℓ‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ℓ‬‬
‫‪ℓ‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪G = Distance between frame or guard rail‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ دو ﻗﺎب ﻳﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﻔﺎظ = ‪G‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻗﻮس ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎزه ﺗﻚ ﻣﺴﻴﺮي )ﻣﻮازي ﺑﺎ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ(‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻗﻮس ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎزه دو ﻣﺴﻴﺮي )ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮازي ﻣﺠﺰا ﻳﻚ در ﻣﻴﺎن(‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻮس ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎزه ﺗﻚ ﻣﺴﻴﺮي )ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﺑﺎرﻳﻚ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه(‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻗﻮس ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎزه دو ﻣﺴﻴﺮي )ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮازي ﻣﺠﺰا(‬
‫‪Fig. 1.7-TYPICAL ROLLER FRAME: CURVED SECTIONS‬‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 7-1‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻗﺎب ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ‪ :‬ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎي ﻗﻮﺳﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫‪ 5-4-5‬ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي اﻓﺘﺮاﻗﻲ‬
‫‪5.4.5 Differential rollers‬‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي اﻓﺘﺮاﻗﻲ در ﻣﻮاردي ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ اي در اﻧﺪازه ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎي روي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺮح اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻛﻨﺶ اﻓﺘﺮاﻗﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن ﭼﻨﺪ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ اﻣﻜﺎن ﻛﺞ‬
‫ﺷﺪن ﺑﺴﺘﻪ را ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Differential rollers are recommended where there‬‬
‫‪is a considerable variation in package size on‬‬
‫‪wider conveyors. The differential action of the‬‬
‫‪multiple roller construction reduces the tendency‬‬
‫‪of the package to skew.‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻗﻮس ﻫﺎ در ﻣﻮاردي ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺗﺮي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ داراي ﭼﻨﺪ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﺑﺮ روي ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺘﺮك ﻳﺎ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻳﻚ در ﻣﻴﺎن و رﻳﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد در ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻮاردي از ﺣﻔﺎظ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻤﻜﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫ﺷﻮد‪ .‬در ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎي ﻗﻮﺳﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮي ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎي راﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺎز اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪These curves may have multiple rollers on a‬‬
‫‪common shaft or staggered rollers and center rail‬‬
‫‪where heavier loads are handled. Auxiliary guards‬‬
‫‪should normally be used. Curves require more‬‬
‫‪grade than straight sections.‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎرﻳﻚ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه‬6-4-5
5.4.6 Tapered rollers
،‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎرﻳﻚ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻏﻠﺘﻚﻫﺎ در ﻗﻮس‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ را ﺑﺮاي‬.‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻪداﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ روي ﻗﻮس ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﻪ ﺣﻔﺎظ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻧﻴﺎزي ﻧﻴﺴﺖ وﻟﻲ‬.‫اﻳﺠﺎد ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺣﻔﺎظ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي رﻋﺎﻳﺖ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در ﺑﻴﺮون ﻗﻮس ﻫﺎ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﺷﻴﺐ‬،‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد در ﺧﻂ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻗﻮس ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬.‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎي راﺳﺖ آن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Tapered rollers are recommended over other
rollers in curves, because they provide the best
carrying surface for holding the package in the
same relative position as it travels around the
curve. Auxiliary guards are normally not required
but are usually furnished on the outside for safety
measures. Grade at the center line of the curve
should be about the same as for straight sections.
‫ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري‬7-4-5
5.4.7 Loading conditions
Impact encountered at loading points may require
heavier frame and roller combinations.
،‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻧﻘﺎط ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ وارد ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺎي ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺗﺮي از ﻗﺎب و ﻏﻠﺘﻚ‬
.‫وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
5.4.8 Special sections (see special accessories
and devices in ANSI/CEMA 401)
‫ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎي وﻳﮋه ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻮازم و‬8-4-5
A successful roller conveyor system frequently
depends on the proper accessories. Various
accessories, such as spur sections, converging
sections, hinged sections, gate sections, switch
sections, herringbone sections, disappearing roller
sections, transfer cars, turntables, rollovers, ball
and caster tables and also roller spirals are
available and all help to increase the versatility of
a Roller System. However, it should be taken into
consideration that some of the above Special
Sections may require manual assistance to move
material to and from the conveyor.
‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﻛﺎرآﻣﺪ اﻏﻠﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
،‫ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎي اﻧﺸﻌﺎﺑﻲ‬،‫ ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ‬.‫واﺑﺴﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺎﭘﺪﻳﺪ‬،‫ ﺟﻨﺎﻏﻲ‬،‫ ﺳﻮزﻧﻲ‬،‫ دروازهاي‬،‫ ﻟﻮﻻدار‬،‫ﻫﻤﮕﺮا‬
،‫ روﻏﻠﺘﺎن ﻫﺎ‬،‫ ﻣﻴﺰﻫﺎي ﮔﺮدان‬،‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻧﺘﻘﺎل دﻫﻨﺪه‬،‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪه‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﻫﺎي رو ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ دار و ﻣﻴﺰﻫﺎي ﺗﻨﮕﻮاره دار ﻣﻔﺼﻠﻲ و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺎرﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ وﺟﻮد دارﻧﺪ و ﻫﻤﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ‬
‫ ﺑﺎ وﺟﻮد اﻳﻦ‬.‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﭘﺬﻳﺮي ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ از‬،‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
‫ﻟﻮازم و وﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻳﺎد ﺷﺪه ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎر از‬
.‫روي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺬاﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎر ﺑﺮ روي آن ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ دﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
(ANSI/CEMA 401 ‫وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ در‬
‫ راﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ و ﻧﺼﺐ‬5-5
5.5 Guidance on Selection and Installation
‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-5-5
5.5.1 General
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ و ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ‬
‫ ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮ‬6-5-5 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬2-5-5 ‫ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ ذﻛﺮ ﺷﺪه در ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎي ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‬
.‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
In selecting and installing roller conveyor
equipment account should be taken of the factors
in 5.5.2 to 5.5.6.
(‫ ﮔﺎم ﻏﻠﺘﻚ )ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ‬2-5-5
5.5.2 Roller pitch (roller centers)
‫ ﺑﻌﻨﻮان اﻟﺰام‬،‫ زﻳﺮﻫﺮ ﺑﺎر داراي ﻛﻒ ﺗﺨﺖ ﺳﺨﺖ‬،‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
‫ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ‬،‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺜﺎل‬.‫ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ در ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬3 ‫ ﺑﺎ‬،‫ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ‬
100 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي داراي ﮔﺎم‬300 ‫ﻛﻒ ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮل‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ‬275 ‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي و ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﻒ ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮل‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي دارد‬75 ‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚﻫﺎي داراي ﮔﺎم‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﺿﺮﺑﻪ زﻧﻨﺪه ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬،‫در ﻧﻘﺎط ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري‬
‫اﺳﺖ ﻻزم ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺎم ﻏﻠﺘﻚﻫﺎ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ داده ﺷﻮد ﻳﺎ از‬
.‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚﻫﺎي وﻳﮋهاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠــﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﻓﺮورﻓﺘﮕﻲ در ﺑـــﺎرﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﻧﻌﻄﺎف‬
Under any rigid flat based load there should be
full 3 roller contact as a minimum requirement.
For example, a 300 mm long running surface
requires rollers at 100 mm pitch; a 275 mm
running surface requires rollers at 75 mm pitch.
At loading points the roller pitch may have to be
reduced or special rollers provided to
accommodate shock loads.
Flexible loads such as thin cardboard cartons may
19
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
need a reduced pitch of roller or require wheel
conveyors to prevent sagging.
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﮔﺎم‬،‫ﻛﺎرﺗﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻘﻮاﻳﻲ ﻧﺎزك‬
.‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﭼﺮﺧﺪار ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﻫﺎي روي ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ آزاد ﺑﺎر‬،(‫ ﻧﻮارﻫﺎ و درزﻫﺎ‬،‫ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ‬،‫ ﻣﻨﮕﻨﻪ‬، ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي‬
‫را ﻣﺨﺘﻞ ﻛﺮده و ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎم وزن ﺑﺎر را ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از‬
.‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ وارد ﻛﻨﺪ‬
Projections on the running surfaces of the load
(such as binding wire, staples, straps and seams)
impair the free travel of the load and might
impose the full load weight on each individual
roller.
‫ ﻃﻮل ﻏﻠﺘﻚ‬3-5-5
5.5.3 Roller length
‫ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي داراي ﻛﻒ ﺗﺨﺖ ﺳﺨﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺮ روي ﻏﻠﺘﻚﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬.‫داراي ﻋﺮض ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از ﺑﺎر ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎي ﺑﺎ ﻛﻒﻫﺎي ﻟﺒﻪدار ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎرﺗﻦﻫﺎي ﻣﻘﻮاﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻛﻒ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﻧﻌﻄﺎف از ﻏﻠﺘﻚﻫﺎي ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﺮ از ﻋﺮض ﺑﺎر اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫اﺛﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ وﺟﻬﻲ ﺑﻮدن ﺑﺎرﻫﺎ در ﻗﻮس ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه در ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﻻزم ﺑﺮاي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Rigid flat based loads can be carried on rollers of
less width than the load. Cardboard cartons, rim
based containers or flexible based loads should
have rollers wider than the load.
The polygonal effect of loads at bends may
sometimes be the controlling factor in determining
the minimum width of roller required.
‫ ﺷﻴﺐ‬4-5-5
5.5.4 Gradient
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت رﺿﺎﻳﺘﺒﺨﺶ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺐ و ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻴﺐﻫﺎ‬
‫ در ﺑﺮﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪه ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ اﺳﺖ و ﻟﺬا‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد وﻳﮋه‬
.‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه واﮔﺬار ﺷﻮد‬
The specification of the most satisfactory gradient
and transitions between gradients for a particular
application involves a number of factors, and it is
accordingly recommended that reference be made
to the manufacturer in this matter.
‫ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎه ﺳﺎزه ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬5-5-5
5.5.5 Track support
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻨﻜﻪ از ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﺎر ﺳﺎزه ﻫﺎي ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺳﺎزه ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻛﺎﻓﻲ داراي ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎه‬،‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
‫ اﻧﻮاع ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ از ﺧﺮكﻫﺎي ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ ﻃﺮﺣﻬﺎﻳﻲ داراي‬.‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻃﺒﻖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه‬،‫ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ ﻣﻘﺘﻀﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺧﺮك ﻫﺎ در زﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ‬.‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻧﺼﺐ‬،‫ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﺎور ﻣﺤﻞ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎزه ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬
‫ ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺮك ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪاي ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ‬،‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬.‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺎﺧﻮاﺳﺘﻪ اي در اﺛﺮ ﺑﺎر وارده ﺑﻮﺟﻮد ﻧﻴﺎﻳﺪ‬
Tracks should be adequately supported to prevent
excessive deflection under all operating
conditions. A wide variety of supporting trestles,
of fixed or adjustable height pattern, are available
to manufacturer’s standard construction. It is
advisable that these are positioned under or
immediately adjacent to the track section joints.
The distance between trestles should be such that
undue track deflection under load does not occur.
‫ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬6-5-5
5.5.6 Environment
The manufacturer should be consulted in all cases
where equipment complying with this standard is
intended for use in special conditions of
environment (such as in high temperatures, or in
dusty, corrosive or abrasive atmospheres, or in
humid or wet conditions, or on exposed sites).
‫در ﻣﻮاردي ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ ﻳﺎ‬،‫ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ وﻳﮋه اي از ﻣﺤﻴﻂ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ دﻣﺎي زﻳﺎد‬
‫ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺧﻴﺲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺨﺎرآﻟﻮد‬،‫ ﺧﻮرﻧﺪه ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﻨﺪه‬،‫ﻫﻮاي ﻏﺒﺎرآﻟﻮد‬
،‫ﻳﺎ در ﻛﺎرﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎي در ﻣﻌﺮض ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺷﺮاﻳﻄﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.(‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻣﺸﻮرت ﮔﺮدد‬
5.6 Information to be Exchanged between the
Manufacturer and the Purchaser
‫ اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه و ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﻣﺒﺎدﻟﻪ‬6-5
All information regarding the conditions under
which the equipment is to be used, together with
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد ﺗﻤﺎم اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮاﻳﻄﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ آن‬
‫ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ‬،‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ﮔﺮدد‬
20
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
the information indicated in Appendix A, should
be supplied with the inquiry or order. The
manufacturer shall supply the information listed in
Appendix B when tendering. Vendor shall supply
information and drawings listed in Appendix C
after receipt of order.
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫در ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ اﻟﻒ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻔﺎرش‬
‫ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻨﺎﻗﺼﻪ‬.‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ اراﺋﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ‬،‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ را ﻛﻪ در ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ب ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت و ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ را ﻛﻪ در ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ج‬
.‫ اراﺋﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ‬،‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ را ﭘﺲ از درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺳﻔﺎرش‬
‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬-6
6. SAFETY
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﻏﻴﺮﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻓﻮﻻدي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻛﺎرﻛﻨﺎن‬
‫ﺑﻬﺮه ﺑﺮداري ﻃﺒﻖ آﺧﺮﻳﻦ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎ‬
ASME/ANSI B 20.1 ‫و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺮﺑﻮط آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره‬
.‫ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
Steel Non-powered roller conveyors shall be
designed with safety provisions for the protection
of operating personnel in accordance with
ASME/ANSI B 20.1 safety standard for
conveyors and related equipment, latest edition.
‫ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ و آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‬-7
7. INSPECTION AND TESTING
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪﻫﺎي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﺷﺪه درﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻫﻢﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه در ﻛﺎرﮔﺎه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﻌﺮض ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﭼﺸﻤﻲ و‬
.‫اﺑﻌﺎدي ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
The conveyors completed in the fabrication shop
and/or field assembled shall be subjected to the
visual and dimensional check of assemblies.
‫ ﻣﻐﺎﻳﺮت در اﺳﻨﺎد‬-8
8. CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
‫در ﺻﻮرت وﺟﻮد اﺧﺘﻼف و ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺾ در اﺳﻨﺎد و ﻣﺪارك ﻣﺮﺑﻮط‬
‫ اﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ در ﻣﻮرد ﻣﺪارك‬،‫ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﻌﻼم ﻳﺎ ﺳﻔﺎرش ﺧﺮﻳﺪ‬
:‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
In the case of conflict between documents relating
to the inquiry or order, the following priority of
documents shall apply:
.‫ ﺳﻔﺎرش ﺧﺮﻳﺪ و ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات آن‬: ‫ اوﻟﻮﻳﺖ اول‬-
- First Priority: Purchase order and variations
thereto.
.‫ داده ﺑﺮگﻫﺎ و ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎ‬: ‫ اوﻟﻮﻳﺖ دوم‬-
- Second Priority: Data sheets and drawings.
.‫ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬: ‫ اوﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺳﻮم‬-
- Third Priority: This Standard.
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻐﺎﻳﺮت ﻫﺎ در اﺳﻨﺎد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺼﻮرت ﻛﺘﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ارﺟﺎع‬
،‫ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار در ﺻﻮرت ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺮاي روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬.‫داده ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻣﺪارك ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪي را ﺻﺎدر ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‬
All conflicting requirements shall be referred to
the Purchaser in writing. The Purchaser will issue
confirmation document if needed for clarification
‫آﻣﺎده ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻤﻞ‬-9
9. PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT
‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻮع ﺣﻤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬1-9
9.1 Equipment shall be suitably prepared for the
type of shipment specified. The preparation shall
be mutually agreed upon and, unless otherwise
specified, shall make the equipment suitable for 2
years of outdoor storage from the time of
shipment.
‫ ﻧﺤﻮه آﻣﺎده ﻛﺮدن آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ‬.‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ آﻣﺎده ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻦ رﺳﻴﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و در ﺻﻮرﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ دﻳﮕﺮي ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺒﺎر ﻛﺮدن در ﻓﻀﺎي آزاد ﺑﻪ‬
.‫ ﺳﺎل از زﻣﺎن ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬2 ‫ﻣﺪت‬
‫ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻻزم ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻔﻆ‬
9.2 The Vendor shall provide the Purchaser with
the instructions necessary to preserve the integrity
of the storage preparation after the equipment
arrives at the job site and before start-up.
2-9
‫ﻳﻜﭙﺎرﭼﮕﻲ ﻣﻮارد ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ اﻧﺒﺎر ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﭘﺲ از وارد‬
‫ﺷﺪن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎرﮔﺎه و ﭘﻴﺶ از آﻏﺎز ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮاي‬
.‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪار را ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ از دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه‬3-9
9.3 One copy of the manufacturer’s standard
installation instructions shall be packed and
shipped with the equipment.
.‫ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
21
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
9.4 Each part of the conveyor shall be affixed with
a metal tag, indicating its name and part number
to facilitate conveyor assembling.
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺳﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روي ﻫﺮ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺑﺮ‬4-9
9.5 Unless otherwise specified, separate shipment
of the equipment is not allowed.
‫ ﺣﻤﻞ‬،‫ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮه دﻳﮕﺮي ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﺸﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬5-9
‫ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬،‫ﺑﺴﺖ ﻓﻠﺰي ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎم و ﺷﻤﺎره ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺑﺮ آن ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه‬
.‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺠﺎز ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ و ﺗﻌﻬﺪ‬-10
10. GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه در ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﺧﻮد اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻧﻜﺮده ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫اﻳﻨﻄﻮر ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ و ﺗﻌﻬﺪ زﻳﺮ ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ‬
:‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در‬،‫ ﻣﺎه ﭘﺲ از ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ راه اﻧﺪازي‬12 ‫در ﺧﻼل‬
‫اﺳﺮع وﻗﺖ و ﺑﺪون ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﻛﺎﻻﻫﺎ و ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺗﻲ از‬
‫ ﻋﺪم ﻣﻬﺎرت در ﻛﺎر ﻳﺎ‬،‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﻮب ﺑﻮدن ﻣﻮاد‬
‫از ﻗﻠﻢ اﻓﺘﺎدﮔﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻫﻲ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه داراي ﻧﻘﺺ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ را‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﺪ و ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺑﻮﻳﮋه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي دﻳﮕﺮي را ﻛﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات در ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺼﺮف آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ وي‬
.‫ﭘﺮداﺧﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
Unless exception is recorded by the Vendor in his
proposal, it shall be understood that the Vendor
agrees to the following guarantee and warranties:
During a period of 12 months after the date of
commissioning, the Vendor shall, with all possible
speed and without cost to the Purchaser, replace
or repair the goods or any part thereof found to be
defective due to faulty material, workmanship or
to any act or omission of the Vendor. In the
particular the Vendor shall reimburse any
transportation and other charges incurred by the
Purchaser in effecting such replacement or repair
at the point of use.
22
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
APPENDICES
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
APPENDIX A
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ اﻟﻒ‬
INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED WITH
INQUIRY OR ORDER (see clause. 5.6) in part 1
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻔﺎرش اراﺋﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
The following particulars will enable the
manufacturer to select the most suitable
equipment from his production range to suit the
proposed application:
‫وﻳﮋﮔﻲﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه را ﻗﺎدر ﻣﻲ ﺳﺎزد ﺗﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را از داﻣﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪات ﺧﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي‬
:‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ اﺳﺖ راﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
1 ‫(در ﺑﺨﺶ‬6-5 ‫)ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻨﺪ‬
1) Maximum and minimum sizes of loads* in
millimeters.
‫( اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ و ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎ * )ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ( ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬1
2) Maximum and minimum weights of loads in
kilograms.
‫( وزن ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ و ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎ )ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ( ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬2
3) Particulars of running surface if not flat and
rigid.
.‫( وﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎي ﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﻒ ﺑﺎري ﻛﻪ ﺗﺨﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺨﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬3
4) Any special operational conditions (see
5.5.6).
‫( ﻫـﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛـــﺎر وﻳﮋه )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‬4
5) Whether fixed or adjustable stands are
required.
.‫( ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮكﻫﺎي )ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎي( ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻴﺎز اﺳﺖ‬5
6) Maximum accumulating load per 2.5 m
length, or 3 m length, in kilograms.
‫ ﻣﺘﺮ‬3 ‫ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ‬،‫ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻃﻮل‬2/5 ‫( ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﺎر ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ در ﻫﺮ‬6
7) Conditions of loading, i.e. single load travel
or batching.
‫ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﺪن ﺑﺎر ﺑﺼﻮرت ﺗﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ‬،‫( ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري‬7
8) Details of any impact loading, including its
location, i.e. locally or continuously along the
track.
‫( ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﺿﺮﺑﻪ اي ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺤﻞ آن‬8
9) If possible, a sketch of the proposed layout,
with such details as available clearance
heights.
‫( اﮔﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﺮوﻛﻲ ﻃﺮح ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﻳﺎ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬9
.‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
.‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم‬
.(6-5-5
.‫ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم‬،‫ﻃﻮل‬
.‫ﺑﺼﻮرت دﺳﺘﻪ اي‬
.‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ اي ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ در ﻃﻮل ﺳﺎزه ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬
.‫ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ آزاد در ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻫﺎ‬
‫* اوﻟﻴﻦ اﻧﺪازهاي ﻛﻪ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ داده ﺷﻮد اﻧﺪازه ﻟﺒﻪ‬
* First Dimension Given to be that of the
Leading Edge Normal to the Direction of
Travel.
.‫ﻣﻘﺪم ﺑﺎرﻋﻤﻮد ﺑﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ آن اﺳﺖ‬
23
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
1
2
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ب‬
APPENDIX B
٣
INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE
MANUFACTURER (see Clause. 5.6)in part 1
۴
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه اراﺋﻪ ﺷﻮد )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ‬
1 ‫(در ﺑﺨﺶ‬6-5‫ﺑﻨﺪ‬
1) Maximum and minimum sizes of loads* in
millimeters.
‫( اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ و ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎ* )ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ( ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬1
2) Maximum and minimum weights of loads in
kilograms.
‫( وزن ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ و ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎ )ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ( ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬2
3) Maximum accumulating load capability per
2.5 m length, or 3.0 m length, in kilograms.
‫ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻃﻮل ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ‬2/5 ‫( ﺗﻮاﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﺎر در ﻫﺮ‬3
.‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
.‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم‬
.‫ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻃﻮل ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم‬3/0
:‫( ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ‬4
4) Rollers:
.‫اﻟﻒ( ﻃﻮل ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
a) Length in millimeters.
.‫ب( ﻗﻄﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
b) Diameter in millimeters.
.‫ج( ﮔﺎم )ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ( ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
c) Pitch (Roller centers) in millimeters.
.‫د( ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻧﺮم )ﻧﺎﻳﻪ( ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
d) Thickness of tube in millimeters.
.‫ﻫ( اﻧﺪازه ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
e) Spindle size in millimeters.
f) Type of bearing (including
arrangement if applicable).
.(‫و( ﻧﻮع ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن )ﺷﺎﻣﻞ آراﻳﺶ آب ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎ در ﺻﻮرت وﺟﻮد‬
sealing
.‫ز( روش ﻧﮕﻬﺪاﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ در ﻗﺎب‬
g) Method of retaining spindle in frame.
:‫( ﺳﺎزه ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬5
5) Track:
.‫اﻟﻒ( ﻧﻮع و آراﻳﺶ اﺟﺰاء ﻗﺎب‬
a) Type and arrangement of frame members.
.‫ب( ﻃﻮل ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺘﺮ‬
b) Length in meters.
.‫ج( ﻋﺮض ﻛﻠﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
c) Overall width in millimeters.
‫د( ارﺗﻔﺎع از ﻛﻒ ﺳﺎزه ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺗﺎ روي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ‬
d) Height from bottom of track to top of
roller in millimeters.
.‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
.‫ ﻧﻮع ﺟﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎزه ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬:‫( اﺗﺼﺎﻻت‬6
6) Connections: Type of coupling between
track sections.
:(‫( ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ )ﺧﺮك ﻫﺎ‬7
7) Stands:
.‫اﻟﻒ( ﻧﻮع‬
a) Type.
.‫ب( ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﺑﺎ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﺮدن( ﻳﺎ آزاد اﻳﺴﺖ‬
b) Fixed (with fixing details) or free standing;
.‫ج( ﮔﺎم ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﺮ‬
c) Pitch in meters.
24
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
:‫( ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎ )دﺳﺖ اﻧﺪازﻫﺎي( ﺣﻔﺎظ‬8
8) Guard rails:
.‫اﻟﻒ( ﻧﻮع‬
a) Type.
.‫ب( ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻛﻠﻲ از ﺑﺎﻻي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
b) Overall height from top of rollers in
millimeters.
‫* اوﻟﻴﻦ اﻧﺪازه اي ﻛﻪ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ داده ﺷﻮد اﻧﺪازه ﻟﺒﻪ‬
* First Dimension Given to be that of the
Leading Edge Normal to the Direction of
Travel.
.‫ﻣﻘﺪم ﺑﺎر ﻋﻤﻮد ﺑﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ آن اﺳﺖ‬
25
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
5
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ج‬
APPENDIX C
٧
VENDOR DATA REQUIREMENTS AFTER
RECEIPT OF ORDER (see Clause. 5.6)in part 1
٨
6
‫داده ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﭘﺲ از درﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
1 ‫(در ﺑﺨﺶ‬6-5‫ﺳﻔﺎرش اراﺋﻪ ﺷﻮد )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داده ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ را در ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻧﺴﺦ و در روزﻫﺎي‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ از درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺳﻔﺎرش ﺑﺎ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
30 ‫ داده ﻫﺎي ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻇﺮف‬.‫اراﺋﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
:‫روز ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻤﻲ ﭘﺲ از ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ و ﻋﻮدت آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﮔﺮدد‬
Vendor shall furnish the following data in the
number of copies and in the number of calendar
days agreed upon by the purchaser after receipt of
order. Certified data shall be submitted within
thirty (30) calendar days after return of approved
data:
. DWG ‫( ﻧﻘﺸﻪ آراﻳﺶ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬1
1) Equipment general arrangement DWG.
.‫( اﺑﻌﺎد ﻃﺮح ﻛﻠﻲ‬2
2) Outline dimensions.
.‫( ﺑﺮش ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‬3
3) Cross section.
.‫ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎر و ﻏﻴﺮه‬،‫( ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﭘﻲ رﻳﺰي‬4
4) Foundation layout, anchor bolt details, etc.
.‫( ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎ و ﻧﻤﻮدارﻫﺎي ﺑﺮ ﭘﺎﻛﺮدن‬5
5) Erection drawings & diagrams.
.‫( ﺟﺪول ﻣﻮاد‬6
6) Bill of materials;
.‫( ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت‬7
7) Complete part list.
8) Recommended spare parts for 2 years
operation.
.‫( ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻳﺪﻛﻲ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺮاي دو ﺳﺎل ﻛﺎر دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬8
9)
Recommended
commissioning.
for
.‫( ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻳﺪﻛﻲ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺮاي راه اﻧﺪازي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬9
10) Instructions-installation, operation, and
maintenance manual as requested.
‫ راﻫﺒﺮي و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻃﺒﻖ‬،‫ ﻧﺼﺐ‬،‫( دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞﻫﺎي‬10
spare
parts
.‫درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ‬
26
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
35
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
PART TWO
‫ﺑﺨﺶ دوم‬
36
CHAIN OR BELT DRIVEN LIVE ROLLER
37
CONVEYORS
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
27
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
CONTENTS :
Page
No
1.SCOPE…………………………………………..32
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
: ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
32…..………………………………….‫ داﻣﻨﻪ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد‬-1
2. REFERENCES .................................................. 32
32…...………………………………………‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ‬-2
3. UNITS……………………………….…………33
33…………………………………………..‫ واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬-3
4. DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY......... 33
33……………......…………………‫ﺗﻌﺎرﻳﻒ و واژﮔﺎن‬-4
4.1 Chain or Belt Driven Live
Roller Conveyors............................................... 33
‫ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ‬1-4
33 ................................................... ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
4.2 Roller ............................................................ 34
34 ....................................................... ‫ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ‬2-4
4.3 Conveyor Bed .............................................. 34
34 ................................................. ‫ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬3-4
4.4 Conveyor Width .......................................... 34
34 .................................................. ‫ ﻋﺮض ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬4-4
4.5 Chain ............................................................ 34
34 ....................................................... ‫ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬5-4
4.6 Sprocket ....................................................... 34
34 ................................................. ‫ ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬6-4
4.7 Drive ............................................................. 34
34 ................................................... ‫ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه‬7-4
4.8 Take-Up........................................................ 34
34 ............................... (‫ ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه )ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻦ‬8-4
4.9 Fill-In Plates................................................. 35
35 ....................................... ‫ ورﻗﻪ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬9-4
4.10 Horizontal Curve....................................... 35
35 ................................................. ‫ ﻗﻮس اﻓﻘﻲ‬10-4
4.11 Pulley .......................................................... 35
35 ........................................................‫ ﻗﺮﻗﺮه‬11-4
4.12 Idler ............................................................ 35
35 .................................................... ‫ ﻫﺮزﮔﺮد‬12-4
4.13 Pressure Roller .......................................... 35
35 ............................................ ‫ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻓﺸﺎري‬13-4
4.14 Guide Idler................................................. 35
35 ........................................... ‫ ﻫﺮزﮔﺮد راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬14-4
4.15 Snub Roller or Pulley................................ 35
35 ........................... ‫ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺮﻗﺮه ﻛﻤﺎنﮔﺴﺘﺮ‬15-4
4.16 Pop-Out Roller .......................................... 35
35 .......................................... ‫ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﺑﻴﺮون ﭘﺮ‬16-4
28
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
5. DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION................... 38
38 ............................................... .‫ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬-5
5.1 General ......................................................... 38
38 ....................................................... ‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-5
5.2 Conveyor Bed .............................................. 39
39 .................................................. ‫ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬2-5
5.3 Speed and Load ........................................... 40
40 ................................................ ‫ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ و ﺑﺎر‬3-5
5.4 Inclined Conveyors...................................... 40
40 .......................................‫ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺷﻴﺐ دار‬4-5
5.5 Slope ............................................................. 40
40 .........................................................‫ ﺷﻴﺐ‬5-5
5.6 Take-Ups ...................................................... 40
40 .........................(‫ ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ )ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻦ ﻫﺎ‬6-5
5.7 Drive Arrangement ..................................... 41
41 .......................................... ‫ آراﻳﺶ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه‬7-5
5.8 Supports ....................................................... 42
42 ................................................. ‫ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎ‬8-5
5.9 Transfers ...................................................... 42
42 ........................... (‫ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل دﻫﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ )ﺗﺮاﮔﺬارﻫﺎ‬9-5
5.10 Horizontal Curves ..................................... 44
44 ...........................................‫ ﻗﻮس ﻫﺎي اﻓﻘﻲ‬10-5
5.11 Specific Definitions for Belting................. 45
45 .............................. ‫ ﺗﻌﺎرﻳﻒ وﻳﮋه ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺳﺎزي‬11-5
6. ROLLER CHAIN.............................................. 57
57 ............................ (‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻏﻠﺘﮕﻲ )زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ دار‬-6
6.1 Chain Designation ....................................... 57
57 ................................ ‫ ﻧﻤﺎد ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬1-6
6.2 Heavy Series Chains.................................... 57
57 ............................ ‫ ﺳﺮي ﻫﺎي ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬2-6
6.3 Dimensions ................................................... 58
58 .......................................................... ‫ اﺑﻌﺎد‬3-6
6.4 Chain Strength Requirements.................... 58
58 ........................................ ‫ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﺗﺎب زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬4-6
6.5 Chain Length Tolerance ............................. 59
59 ......................................‫ رواداري ﻃﻮل زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬5-6
7. SPROCKETS FOR ROLLER CHAIN ........... 61
61 .................... ‫ ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ‬-7
7.1 Sprocket Types ............................................ 61
61 ....................................... ‫ اﻧﻮاع ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬1-7
7.2 Tooth Profile ................................................ 61
61 ............................................... ‫ ﻧﻴﻤﺮخ دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ‬2-7
7.3 Sprocket Application .................................. 62
62 .............................................. ‫ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬3-7
29
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
74 Sprocket Tooth Forms ................................. 62
62 ........................ ‫ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻫﺎي دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬4-7
7.5 Hub Dimensions .......................................... 62
62 .................................................... ‫ اﺑﻌﺎد ﻧﺎف‬5-7
7.6 Keyways ....................................................... 63
63 .................................................... ‫ ﺟﺎﺧﺎرﻫﺎ‬6-7
7.7 Cutter Sources ............................................. 63
63 ................................................ ‫ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺮاش‬7-7
7.8 General Principles ....................................... 63
63 ................................................. ‫ ﻗﻮاﻋﺪ ﻛﻠﻲ‬8-7
8. MATERIAL……………………………………63
63……………………..………………………‫ ﻣﻮاد‬-8
9.RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION AND
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES....................... 63
63 .................‫ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻴﺎت ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري و ﻧﺼﺐ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﺷﺪه‬-9
9.1 Rigid Shaft Supports................................... 63
63 .............................. ‫ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎي ﺳﺨﺖ ﻣﺤﻮر‬1-9
9.2 Drive Alignment .......................................... 63
63 .................................... ‫ ﻫﻤﺮ اﺳﺘﺎﻳﻲ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه‬2-9
9.3 Chain Tension.............................................. 64
64 ............................................... ‫ ﻛﺸﺶ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬3-9
9.4 Freedom from Interference ........................ 65
65 ........................................... ‫ آزادي از ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ‬4-9
9.5 Center Distance ........................................... 65
65 ........................... ‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬5-9
9.6 Chain Casings .............................................. 66
66 ........................................ ‫ ﻏﻼف ﻫﺎي زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬6-9
9.7 Chain Protection.......................................... 68
68 ............................................. ‫ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬7-9
9.8 Lubrication .................................................. 68
68 ................... (‫ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري )روان ﺳﺎزي ﺑﺎ روﻏﻦ‬8-9
9.9 Methods of Lubrication .............................. 69
69 ..................................... ‫ روﺷﻬﺎي روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬9-9
9.10 Recommended Method ............................. 70
70 ..................................... ‫ روش ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﺷﺪه‬10-9
9.11 Connecting Links ...................................... 71
71 .................................. ‫ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻫﺎي وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬11-9
9.12 Offset Links................................................ 72
72 ................................... ‫ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻫﺎي دو ﺧﻢ دار‬12-9
9.13 Periodic Inspection.................................... 72
72 ......................................... ‫ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ دوره اي‬13-9
9.14 Chain Repair and Replacement ............... 74
74 .................................. ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬14-9
10. SAFETY……………………………………….75
75……………………………………………‫ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬-10
30
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
10.1 Guarding .................................................... 75
75 ............................................ ‫ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻛﺮدن‬1-10
10.2 Safety Devices ............................................ 75
75 .............................................. ‫ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬2-10
10.3 Emergency Stops and Restarts................. 75
75 .... ‫ از ﻛﺎر اﻧﺪاﺧﺘﻦ و ﻛﺎر اﻧﺪازي ﻣﺠﺪد اﺿﻄﺮاري‬3-10
10.4 Other Requirements.................................. 75
75 .............................................. ‫ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت دﻳﮕﺮ‬4-10
11. NAMEPLATE.................................................. 76
76 .............................................. ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت‬-11
12. CONVEYOR INSPECTION AND
TESTING.......................................................... 76
76 ....................................... ‫ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ و آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬-12
13. CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS............. 76
76 .............................................. ‫ ﻣﻐﺎﻳﺮت در اﺳﻨﺎد‬-13
14. PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT .............. 77
77 ....................................... ‫ آﻣﺎده ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻤﻞ‬-14
15. GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY ............... 77
77……………………………………‫ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ و ﺗﻌﻬﺪ‬-15
APPENDICES:
:‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
APPENDIX A-INFORMATION TO BE
SUPPLIED WITH INQUIRY
OR ORDER See Clause 5.6 of part1 78
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ‬-‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ اﻟﻒ‬
‫ﺳﻔﺎرش اراﺋﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
78 .............. ‫( از ﺑﺨﺶ اول‬6-5‫)ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻨﺪ‬
APPENDIX B-INFORMATION TO BE
SUPPLIED BY THE
ANUFACTURER ......................... 79
79.......‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه اراﺋﻪ ﺷﻮد‬- ‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ب‬
APPENDIX C-VENDOR DATA REQUIREMENTS
AFTER RECEIPT OF ORDER ... 81
‫داده ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﭘﺲ از درﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬-‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ج‬
81 ........................................... ‫ﺳﻔﺎرش اراﺋﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
31
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ داﻣﻨﻪ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد‬-1
1. SCOPE
‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
‫ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ و زﻧﺠﻴﺮ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ و‬
،‫ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﭘﺎﻻﻳﺸﮕﺎﻫﻲ‬
‫ ﮔﺎز و ﭘﺘﺮوﺷﻴﻤﻲ و اﻛﺘﺸﺎف و ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ و‬،‫ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎي ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ‬
.‫ﻛﺎرﻫﺎي ﺟﺪﻳﺪ را ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ وي را از‬،‫رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ و ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ آن ﺑﺎ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮرﻳﻜﻪ از ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﮕﻮي ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺎ در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﺎر‬
.‫ ﻣﺒﺮي ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬،‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
This Standard covers minimum requirements for
chain and belt driven live roller conveyors
including roller and transmission chain and
sprockets for use in refinery services, chemical,
gas and petrochemical plants and where
applicable in production and new ventures.
Compliance by the conveyor manufacturer with
the provisions of this Standard does not relieve
him of the responsibility of furnishing conveyor
and accessories of proper design, mechanically
suited to meet guarantees at the specified service
conditions.
No deviations or exceptions from this Standard
shall be permitted without the prior written
approval of the Purchaser.
‫ﺑﺪون ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﺘﺒﻲ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ اﻧﺤﺮاف ﻳﺎ اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﻳﻲ‬
.‫از اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﺠﺎز ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Intended deviations shall be separately listed by
the Vendor and supported by reasons thereof for
Purchaser consideration.
‫اﻧﺤﺮافﻫﺎي ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮر ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪاي ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ دﻻﻳﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ‬-2
2. REFERENCES
Throughout this Standard the following dated and
undated standards/codes are referred to. These
referenced documents shall, to the extent specified
herein, form a part of this standard. For dated
references, the edition cited applies. The
applicability of changes in dated references that
occur after the cited date shall be mutually agreed
upon by the company and the vendor. For undated
references, the latest edition of the referenced
documents (including any supplements and
amendments) applies.
ASME(AMERICAN
SOCIETY
MECHANICAL ENGINEERS)
‫در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﻪ آﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ و اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ دار و‬
‫ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪي ﻛﻪ در‬،‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ‬.‫ﺑﺪون ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ زﻳﺮ اﺷﺎره ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از اﻳﻦ‬،‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪاﻧﺪ‬
‫ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ‬،‫ در ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ دار‬.‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﺤﺴﻮب ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﻣﻼك ﺑﻮده و ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮاﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ در‬
‫ ﭘﺲ از ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎرﻓﺮﻣﺎ و ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬،‫آﻧﻬﺎ داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ آﺧﺮﻳﻦ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ‬،‫ در ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ ﺑﺪون ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬.‫اﺟﺮا ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫اﻧﻀﻤﺎم ﻛﻠﻴﻪ اﺻﻼﺣﺎت و ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖﻫﺎي آن ﻣﻼك ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
(‫ )اﻧﺠﻤﻦ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﺎن ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻚ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬ASME
OF
B 20.1
"Safety Standard for Conveyors
and Related Equipments
‫"اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎ و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
" ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ‬
B 20.1
B 29.100
"Precision Power Transmission,
Double-pitch Power Transmission
Double-Pitch Conveyor Roller
Chains, Attachments and
Sprockets"
،‫" زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻧﻴﺮوي دﻗﻴﻖ‬
،‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻧﻴﺮوي دوﮔﺎم‬
‫ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت و‬،‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ دوﮔﺎم‬
"‫ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
B 29.100
‫ "آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﺴﺘﮕﻲ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ‬B 29.26:2001
"‫اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻧﻴﺮو‬
B29.26:2001 "Fatigue
Testing
Power
Transmission Roller Chain"
32
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
ANSI/CEMA
‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي‬
(AMERICAN
NATIONAL
STANDARDS
INSTITUTE
/CONVEYOR EQUIPMENT
MANUFACTURERS
ASSOCIATION)
Terms
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎن‬
‫ﻣﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ‬
ANSI/CEMA
‫اﻧﺠﻤﻦ‬/‫آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬
( ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻧﻮار ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬
102
"Conveyors
Definitions"
and
"‫"ﺗﻌﺎرﻳﻒ و واژﮔﺎن ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎ‬
102
403
"Belt Driven Live Roller
Conveyors"
‫"ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ‬
"‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬
403
404
"Chain Driven Live Roller
Conveyors"
‫"ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ‬
"‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
404
( ‫ )اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارﻫﺎي ﻧﻔﺖ اﻳﺮان‬IPS
IPS (IRANIAN PETROLEUM STANDARDS)
IPS-E-GN-100
"Engineering
Units"
IPS-M-GN-210
"Material and Equipment
Standard for Conveyors"
ASTM
Standard
"‫"اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺑﺮاي واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬
for
IPS-E-GN-100
‫ "اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻮاد و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺮاي‬IPS-M-GN-210
"‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎ‬
(‫ )اﻧﺠﻤﻦ آزﻣﻮن و ﻣﻮاد آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬ASTM
(AMERICAN
SOCIETY
FOR
TESTING AND MATERIALS)
D 413
"Standard Methods of Testing
Flat Rubber Belting"
‫ آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺮاي‬،‫"روشﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ﭼﺴﺒﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚﻫﺎي ﺳﺨﺖ ﺷﺪه‬
"(‫)آزﻣﻮن ﺳﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫"روش ﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‬
"‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪﻫﺎي ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺖ‬
"Standard
Methods
of
Dynamic Testing for Ply
Separation and Cracking of
Rubber ‘Products"
‫"روشﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﻮﻳﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺟﺪاﻳﺶ ﻻﻳﻪ و ﺗﺮك ﺧﻮردن‬
" ‫ﻓﺮآوردهﻫﺎي ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ‬
D 430
D 413
"Standard Methods of Test
for Adhesion of Vulcanized
Rubber (Friction Test)"
D 378
D 430
D 378
‫ واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬-3
3. UNITS
،(SI) ‫ ﺑﺮﻣﺒﻨﺎي ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬،‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ ﻣﮕﺮ آﻧﻜﻪ در‬،‫ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬IPS-E-GN-100 ‫ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ﻣﺘﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﻪ واﺣﺪ دﻳﮕﺮي اﺷﺎره ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
This Standard is based on International System of
Units (SI) as per IPS-E-GN-100, except where
otherwise specified.
‫ ﺗﻌﺎرﻳﻒ و واژﮔﺎن‬-4
4. DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY
Roller
‫ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬1-4
Conveyors which use a roller bed for the carrying
surface. The unit load ride directly upon the roller
surface, and the rollers are driven by chains and
sprockets and/or for belt driven by belts and
pulleys.
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ در آﻧﻬﺎ از ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﻌﻨﻮان ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ ﺑﺎر ﺗﻜﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﺮ‬.‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه )ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ( اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺳﻮار ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ و ﭼﺮخ‬
‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ و ﻳﺎ در ﻣﻮرد ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬
.‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ و ﻗﺮﻗﺮه ﻫﺎ ﮔﺮداﻧﺪه ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
4.1 Chain
Conveyors
or
Belt
Driven
Live
33
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ‬2-4
4.2 Roller
1) A round part free to revolve its outer
surface. The face may be straight, tapered,
crowned, concave or flanged, corrugated,
ribbed or fluted.
.‫( ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻣﺪوري اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ آن آزاد ﻣﻲ ﭼﺮﺧﺪ‬1
2) A cylindrical member with internal bearings
mounted on a non-rotating shaft.
‫( ﺟﺰء اﺳﺘﻮاﻧﻪ اي داراي ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎي دروﻧﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ‬2
3) A roller with live shafts and outboard
bearings. In a chain driven live roller
conveyor, rollers are powered via sprockets
attached to either or both ends of the roller or
live shaft.
‫( وﺳﻴﻠﻪاي اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ داراي ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺮﻗﻲ و‬3
‫ ﻛﺎو ﻳﺎ‬،‫ ﺗﺎﺟﺪار‬،‫ ﺑﺎرﻳﻚ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه‬،‫ﻧﻤﺎي آن ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ راﺳﺖ‬
.‫ دﻧﺪه دار ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺎره دار ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ ﻣﻮﺟﺪار‬،‫ﻓﻠﻨﺞدار‬
.‫روي ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﭼﺮﺧﻨﺪه ﺳﻮار ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ در‬.‫ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎنﻫﺎﻳﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ در ﺑﻴﺮون از آن ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﭼﺮخ‬،‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ از دو اﻧﺘﻬﺎي آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﺼﻞاﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ از‬
.‫ ﮔﺮداﻧﺪه ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬،‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
‫ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬3-4
4.3 Conveyor Bed
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚﻫﺎي ﺣﺎﻣﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎر را ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﻤﻞ ﻧﮕﻪ‬
.‫ﻣﻲدارﻧﺪ‬
The carrying rollers which support the load while
being conveyed.
‫ ﻋﺮض ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬4-4
4.4 Conveyor Width
‫ اﻧﺪازه ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﺪ‬،‫در ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
-2 ‫ﻛﻨﺎري و ورق ﭘﻮﺷﺶ روي زﻧﺠﻴﺮ اﺳﺖ )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫( ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻗﺎب‬BF) ‫ ب و ج( و اﻧﺪازه درون ﺑﻪ درون‬،‫ اﻟﻒ‬1
.(‫ ج‬،‫ ب‬،‫اﻟﻒ‬-2-2 ‫ در ﺷﻜﻞ ﻫﺎي‬B ‫اﺳﺖ )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه‬
‫ اﻧﺪازه ﻋﺮض ﻛﻠﻲ‬،‫در ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬
-2 ‫ در ﺷﻜﻞ ﻫﺎي‬C ‫( اﺳﺖ )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه‬OAW) ‫ﺑﺴﺘﺮ‬
.(‫ج‬،‫ ب‬،‫اﻟﻒ‬-2
The dimension between side rail and chain cover
plate on chain driven live roller conveyor, (see
Figs. 2.1 a, b, c) and the dimension inside to
inside (BF) of frame rails (see dimension B, Figs.
2.2 a, b, c).Overall width (OAW) of bed (see
dimension C, Figs. 2.2 a, b, c) in belt driven live
roller conveyor.
‫ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬5-4
4.5 Chain
‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮي ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺑﻄﻮر ﭘﺎﺷﻨﻪ ﮔﺮد )ﻣﺤﻮر‬
‫ﮔﺮد( ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ اﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ اي را ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻳﺎ‬
.‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﺮدن ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻴﺮو ﺑﻮﺟﻮد آورﻧﺪ‬
A series of links pivotally joined together to form
a medium for conveying or transmitting motion or
power.
‫ ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬6-4
4.6 Sprocket
‫ﭼﺮﺧﻲ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ زﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ و دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي درﮔﻴﺮ ﺷﺪن ﺑﺎ‬
.‫ﺣﻠﻘﻪﻫﺎي زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ داده و ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‬
A wheel with suitably shaped and spaced cogs, or
teeth, to engage with the links of a chain.
‫ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه‬7-4
4.7 Drive
‫ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬، ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻻزم از ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺳﺎزه اي‬
.‫ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻣﺤﺮك را ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
An assembly of the necessary structural,
mechanical and electrical parts which provide the
motive power for a conveyer.
(‫ ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه )ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻦ‬8-4
4.8 Take-Up
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻻزم از ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ و ﺳﺎزه اي اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ ﺳﺎﺋﻴﺪﮔﻲ و ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺸﺶ زﻧﺠﻴﺮي ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬،‫ﺟﺒﺮان ﻛﺶ آﻣﺪﮔﻲ‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً دﺳﺘﻲ اﺳﺖ و اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮ‬.‫را ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫روي ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ‬
.‫ﮔﻴﺮد‬
The assembly of the necessary structural and
mechanical parts which provides means to
compensate for stretch, or wear, and to maintain
proper chain tension. Adjustment is usually
manual and is employed on continuous chain
driven live roller construction only.
34
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ ورﻗﻪ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬9-4
4.9 Fill-in Plates
‫ورﻗﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﻬﻢ ﺳﻮار ﺷﺪه اي ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻏﻠﺘﻚﻫﺎي‬
.‫ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺬاﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
Closely fitted plates positioned between rollers of
powered or non-powered roller conveyors.
‫ ﻗﻮس اﻓﻘﻲ‬10-4
4.10 Horizontal Curve
.‫ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﺎر ﺑﻜﺎر ﻣﻴﺮود‬
A conveyor section used to change the direction
of travel.
‫ ﻗﺮﻗﺮه‬11-4
4.11 Pulley
‫ﻋﻀﻮي اﺳﺖ اﺳﺘﻮاﻧﻪاي ﺑﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪون ﻧﻤﺎي ﺗﺎﺟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ روي ﻳﻚ‬
.‫ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﻨﺪه ﺳﻮار ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
A cylindrical member with or without a crown
face mounted on a revolving or fixed shaft.
‫ ﻫﺮزﮔﺮد‬12-4
4.12 Idler
‫ ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ در ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬،‫ ﭼﺮخ ﺷﻴﺎردار‬،‫ﻗﺮﻗﺮه‬
‫ زﻧﺠﻴﺮي ﺑﻪ دور آن ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد; ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬،‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ‬
.‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
A pulley, sheave, sprocket, or wheel around which
a chain passes in changing direction of travel;
chain- supporting sprocket.
‫ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻓﺸﺎري‬13-4
4.13 Pressure Roller
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﮕﻬﺪاﺷﺘﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه در ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺎ‬
.‫ ﺑﻜﺎر ﻣﻴﺮود‬،‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚﻫﺎي ﺣﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎر‬
The roller used for holding the driving belt in
contact with the load-carrying rollers.
‫ ﻫﺮزﮔﺮد راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬14-4
4.14 Guide Idler
‫ ﻳﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ آزاد ﻣﻲ ﭼﺮﺧﺪ و ﺑﺮاي‬،‫ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ‬،‫ﻗﺮﻗﺮه‬
‫ ﺟﻬﺖ دادن ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪاﺷﺘﻦ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬،‫ ﻫﺪاﻳﺖ ﻛﺮدن‬،‫ﻣﺤﺪود ﻛﺮدن‬
.‫ ﺑﻜﺎر ﻣﻴﺮود‬،‫واﺳﻂ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻧﻴﺮو در ﻣﺤﺪوده ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه‬
A pulley, roller, or wheel free to rotate and used to
limit, guide, direct, or confine the conveying or
power transmission medium within the limits of a
defined path.
‫ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺮﻗﺮه ﻛﻤﺎﻧﮕﺴﺘﺮ‬15-4
4.15 Snub Roller or Pulley
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺮﻗﺮه اي اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻤﺎن ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ و ﻗﺮﻗﺮه‬
.‫ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه ﻳﺎ ﻗﺮﻗﺮه ﺑﺮﮔﺮدان را اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻣﻲدﻫﺪ‬
Any roller or pulley used to increase the arc of
contact between a belt and drive or tail pulley.
‫ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﺑﻴﺮون ﭘﺮ‬16-4
4.16 Pop-out Roller
A special load-carrying roller mounted in such a
manner as to pop-out when foreign objects are
introduced between the belt and the roller.
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ وﻳﮋه اي اﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎر ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ اي ﺳﻮار ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
،‫ﺗﺎ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻴﻜﻪ اﺷﻴﺎء ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ و ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﻴﺮون ﺑﭙﺮد‬
Note: For more definitions refer to ANSI/CEMA
102, ANSI/CEMA 403 and ANSI/CEMA 404.
ANSI/CEMA ‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻌﺎرﻳﻒ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ‬:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
.ANSI/CEMA 404 ‫ و‬102 ANSI/CEMA 403
35
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
38
TYPICAL CROSS SECTIONS
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮش ﻫﺎي ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‬
39
Fig. 2.1
1-2 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
36
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ ‪Mar. 2009/ 1388‬‬
‫)‪IPS-M-GN-210(1‬‬
‫‪TYPICAL CROSS SECTIONS‬‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮش ﻫﺎي ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‬
‫)ﻋﺮض ﻛﻠﻲ(‬
‫)ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻬﺎ(‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫)ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻬﺎ(‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻓﺸﺎري ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه در ﺑﺎﻻي‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه در ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺎب ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎوداﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎب ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎوداﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺗﺨﺖ‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺮﮔﺮدان‬
‫)‪(A‬‬
‫)اﻟﻒ(‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻓﺸﺎري‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه در‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه در‬
‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻗﺎب ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻي ﻗﺎب ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺎوداﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺗﺨﺖ‬
‫)‪(B‬‬
‫)ب(‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺮﮔﺮدان‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه در‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻي ﻗﺎب ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺎوداﻧﻲ‬
‫ﭼﺮخ ﺷﻴﺎردار‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪V‬‬
‫)‪(C‬‬
‫)ج(‬
‫‪Fig. 2.2‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪2-2‬‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎري‬
‫ﻧﺎوداﻧﻲ‬
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬-5
5. DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-5
5.1 General
Chain driven live roller conveyors are used to
carry loads with flat, smooth, firm bottom riding
surface at controlled speeds. They are better suited
than belt driven live roller conveyors in
applications where heat, dirt, oil, grease, water
and other contaminants are present. The driving
chain or chains are at one end of the rollers and
can be shielded and guarded. Chain driven live
roller conveyors are ideal for carrying heavy or
bulky loads.
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﺑﺎ‬
‫ در ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬،‫ ﻫﻤﻮار و ﻣﺤﻜﻢ‬،‫ﻛﻒ ﺳﻮار ﺷﻮﻧﺪه ﺗﺨﺖ‬
،‫ ﻛﺜﻴﻔﻲ‬،‫ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎرﺑﺮدﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ‬.‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﻜﺎر ﻣﻴﺮوﻧﺪ‬
‫ آب و آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ ﻫﺎي دﻳﮕﺮ وﺟﻮد دارد ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ‬،‫ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ‬،‫ﭼﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ‬.‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه در ﻳﻚ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ و‬
‫ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ‬.‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮان آﻧﻬﺎ را ﭘﻮﺷﺶ دار و ﺣﻔﺎظدار ﻛﺮد‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ‬
.‫ﺗﻮده اي )ﻓﻠﻪ اي( ﻣﻄﻠﻮب ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
Two types of chain driven live roller conveyors
are considered:
‫در اﻳﻨﺠﺎ دو ﻧﻮع ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻣﻮرد‬
:‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﻧﺪ‬
a) Continuous chain type (Figs. 2.4.a to 2.4.i)
b) Roll-to-Roll type
( ‫ ط‬4-2 ‫ اﻟﻒ ﺗﺎ‬4-2 ‫اﻟﻒ( ﻧﻮع زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ )ﺷﻜﻞ ﻫﺎي‬
(Figs. 2.5.a to 2.5.h)
(‫ ح‬5-2 ‫ اﻟﻒ ﺗﺎ‬5-2 ‫ب( ﻧﻮع ﻏﻠﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻠﺖ )ﺷﻜﻞ ﻫﺎي‬
.‫ﻧﻮع زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ اوﻟﻴﻪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮي را دارا اﺳﺖ‬
‫آن ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ رﺷﺘﻪ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺗﻜﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ روي ﭼﺮخ‬
‫ در اﻳﻦ‬.‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻮش ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬرد‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ورﻗﻲ‬،‫ﻧﻮع ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ و ﻳﻚ رﺷﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﺎ درﮔﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺪن ﺑﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻي ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي‬
‫ )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬.‫ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ را ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮداﻧﺪ‬،‫ﮔﺮداﻧﺪه ﺷﺪه‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﺗﻜﻲ ﺑﺎ وزن ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﻜﺎر‬.( ‫ د‬4-2
.‫ﻣﻴﺮود‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺎﺧﺖ اﺟﺎزه ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي )ﮔﺎم( ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ‬
.‫در ﻏﻠﺘﻚﻫﺎي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻏﻠﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻠﺖ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﻗﻒﻫﺎي اﺿﻄﺮاري ( ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﺮدن‬
.‫و ﺑﻜﺎر اﻧﺪاﺧﺘﻦ ﺗﻜﺮاري درﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎس زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪاﻧﻪﻫﺎي ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﻪ‬.‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪار ورﻗﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻔﺖ‬.‫ﺳﺎزه ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻧﻴﺎز ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
The continuous chain type has the lower initial
cost. It consists of a single strand of chain
traveling over sprockets welded to the rollers. In
this type construction, a single plate sprocket is
attached to each roller and a continuous strand or
loop of chain drives all rollers by engaging just
the top teeth of each driven sprocket (Fig. 2.4.d).
This construction is used for moderate weight unit
loads.
It allows closer centerlines on carrying rollers
than roll-to-roll construction. The construction is
not intended for frequent stopping (except for
emergency stopping) and starting applications.
Contact with the sprocket teeth is maintained by a
continuous cover plate with wearing bar holddown. Chain is usually returned in a return track.
An adjustable chain take-up is required with this
construction.
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي اﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ در اﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ‬
.‫ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﭼﻤﻪ اي دﻗﻴﻖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
،‫ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪهﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً در اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﺟﺎي داده ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫وﻟﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮ روي رﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ‬
.‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
The end rollers in this type construction should be
equipped with precision ball bearings.
Drives are normally located at head end of
conveyor, but an intermediate drive on the return
strand of chain may be used.
38
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ در اﻳﻦ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺎﺧﺖ دو‬.‫ﺳﺎﺧﺖ "دو رﺷﺘﻪ اي" ﻧﻴﺰ وﺟﻮد دارد‬
(‫ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ رﺷﺘﻪ از زﻧﺠﻴﺮ دو ﻋﺮض )ﭘﻬﻠﻮ‬،‫( رﺷﺘﻪ ﺗﻜﻲ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬2)
‫ﺑﻜﺎرﻣﻲ رود ﺗﺎ ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ دار ﺗﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪه و ﺑﺼﻮرت ﻳﻚ در ﻣﻴﺎن ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪاﻧﺪ را‬
.‫ﺑﮕﺮداﻧﺪ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آوردن ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﻧﺰدﻳﻜﺘﺮ‬
.‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ دو ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ورﻗﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ‬،‫در ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻏﻠﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻠﺖ‬
‫ و ﻫﺮ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي‬،‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﺟﻮش ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺟﻔﺖ را ﺑﺼﻮرت ﻳﻚ در ﻣﻴﺎن در ﻃﻮل ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﻬﻢ وﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ آراﻳﺶ ﮔﺮداﻧﺪن‬. (‫ ب و د‬،‫ اﻟﻒ‬5-2 ‫)ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ و ﻛﺎرﺑﺮدﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﻜﺮر ﻧﻴﺎز‬
‫ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻮرد‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﺮدن ﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن وﺟﻮد دارد‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﮔﺮاﻧﺘﺮ ﺑﻮده و ﻧﻴﺎز‬،‫ ﺑﻬﺮﺣﺎل‬.‫درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺮوي ﺑﺮق ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮي دارد‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ را ﻣﻴﺘﻮان ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ در ﺣﺎل اﻧﺠﺎم اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﺑﻬﺮه‬
‫ آﻧﻬﺎ در ﺟﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ اﺟﺎزه داده ﻣﻴﺸﻮد ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي‬.‫ﺑﺮداري ﻗﺮار داد‬
،‫ﺗﻜﻲ اﻧﺒﺎﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه و ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪن ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻨﻮان واﺳﻂ زﻣﺎﻧﺒﻨﺪي در ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺳﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎي‬
.‫ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎرﺑﺮداري ﺑﻜﺎر ﻣﻴﺮوﻧﺪ‬،‫ ﺗﺮاﺑﺮي‬،‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﻜﭙﺎرﭼﻪ‬
"Double-strand" construction is also available. It
consists of two (2) single strands of chain, or a
single strand of double width chain, used to drive
single rack tooth sprockets attached to each roller
with rack tooth sprockets on alternate rollers
offset.
This construction is used to obtain closer
centerlines on the carrying rollers (See Fig. 2.4.e).
In the roll to roll type of construction, two plate
sprockets are welded to each roller, and individual
loops of chain connect pairs of rollers in a
staggered pattern, along the length of the
conveyor (Figs. 2.5.a, b and d). This driving
arrangement is more desirable for heavy loads and
for applications requiring frequent stopping or
reversing service. However, it is more expensive
and requires additional power.
Belt driven live roller conveyors can be operated
at the speed best suited for the work being
performed. They are used where unit loads are
allowed to accumulate causing blocked line
conditions, as a pacesetter for assembly
operations, for transportation, for loading on and
off or as a timing medium for integrated handling
systems.
Purchaser shall specify type of conveyor. Use of
belt driven conveyors shall be subjected to
explicit approval of the Company.
‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي‬.‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﻮع ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ را ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺻﺮﻳﺢ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Note: In addition to the requirements of this
Standard, basic considerations in design and
selection of chain and belt driven live roller
conveyors and components should be in
accordance with ANSI / CEMA 403 and ANSI /
CEMA 404.
،‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت اﺳﺎﺳﻲ در ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
‫ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ و اﺟﺰاء ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬
ANSI/CEMA 404 ‫ و‬ANSI/CEMA 403 ‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬2-5
5.2 Conveyor Bed
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد ﺳﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﺑﺼﻮرت ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎه ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻫﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎر‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و دﺳﺖ ﻛﻢ دو ﻋﺪد از آﻧﻬﺎ در ﺣﺎل ﮔﺮداﻧﺪه ﺷﺪن ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ اﺟﺎزه دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ در‬،‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚﻫﺎي ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻫﺮزﮔﺮد ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي‬.‫ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ و ﻧﻴﺮوي ﺑﺮق ﻻزم ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﺑﺮﻳﺪه‬،‫ﻫﺮزﮔﺮد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪن زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه و اﻓﺘﺎدن آن ﺑﺮ روي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ‬
.‫ﻧﻮارﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﻳﺸﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
There should be a minimum of three rollers
supporting the shortest load, with at least two
being driven. This may allow the use of one or
more idler rollers between the powered rollers,
resulting in a saving in cost and power
requirements. When idler rollers are used, wear
bands may be required to prevent the drive chain
from cutting into the roller.
39
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
The use of bands depends upon the difference in
roller and sprocket diameters and the spacing of
the driven rollers (Fig. 2.5.d).
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از اﻳﻦ ﻧﻮارﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ اﺧﺘﻼف ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ و‬
.(‫ د‬5-2 ‫ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ و ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻚﻫﺎي ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه دارد )ﺷﻜﻞ‬
Reduced pressure type (rack tooth) sprockets
should be used on continuous chain driven live
roller conveyor where tangential contact occurs.
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد در ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
‫ از ﭼﺮخ‬،‫ در ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻣﻤﺎﺳﻲ اﺗﻔﺎق ﻣﻲ اﻓﺘﺪ‬،‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ‬
.‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي )دﻧﺪاﻧﻪدار( ﻧﻮع ﻓﺸﺎري ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻟﺒﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ روﻧﺪه ﺑﺎر ﺗﻜﻲ ﺑﺮ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي‬
‫ ﻣﻴﺘﻮان ورﻗﻪﻫﺎي‬،‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻮار ﺷﻮد و ﺑﻴﻦ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﺮوﻧﻨﺸﻴﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﭘﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪه را ﺑﻴﻦ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮد‬
Fill-in plates may be added between the carrying
rollers to ensure that the leading edge of a unit
load will ride on the carrying roller and not sag
between rollers
‫ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ و ﺑﺎر‬3-5
5.3 Speed and Load
‫ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﺗﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺟﺎ‬
.‫ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ و ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﮔﺮدد‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫اﻧﺪازه و وزن ﺑﺴﺘﻪ در ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن ﻗﺎب و ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻏﺎﻟﺐ دارد‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ اول ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﻓﻮﻻدي ﻏﻴﺮ‬-6 ‫)ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬،‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬،‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬.(‫ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه اي ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻄﻮرﻳﻜﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎ‬
.‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﻮد و ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻛﺸﺶ ﻛﺎري زﻧﺠﻴﺮ را ﻛﺎﻫﺶ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺘﺮ در دﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬18 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬9 ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ وﺟﻮد ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻤﺘﺮي‬،‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬،‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬.‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
.‫اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي دﻗﻴﻖ و ﻳﺎ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ و ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ داراي ﺣﻔﺎظ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
The number of unit loads a belt driven live roller
conveyor will handle is determined by its speed
and the package spacing. The size and weight of
the package governs the frame and roller
construction. (See Clause 6-Part One Steel Nonpowered Roller Conveyors.) For a given delivery
rate, the speed should be as high as practical so
that the loads are spaced further apart, thus
reducing the working tension of the chain.
Conveyors are normally run at speeds between 9
to 18 meters per minutes (mpm), however, greater
or lesser speeds may be used. For greater speeds,
precision bearings and / or chain lubrication may
be required. Chains and sprockets should be
guarded.
‫ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺷﻴﺐ دار‬4-5
5.4 Inclined Conveyors
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻳﺠﺎد ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات ﻛﻢ در ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎر و ﻣﺤﻞﻫﺎي ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ از ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬،‫آﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺗﻤﺎم ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي‬.‫ﺷﻴﺐدار اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬.‫روي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺷﻴﺐ دار از ﻧﻮع ﮔﺮداﻧﺪه ﺷﻮﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫از ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺷﻴﺐ دار ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺒﺎﺷﺖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
Inclined belt and chain driven live roller
conveyors are used to make minor changes in the
elevations between the load and the discharge
ends. All rollers should be driven on inclined
conveyors. Inclined conveyors should not be used
for accumulation.
‫ ﺷﻴﺐ‬5-5
5.5 Slope
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد ﺷﻴﺐ ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﻫﺎي داراي ﻛﻒ‬
‫ در ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي‬،‫ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ‬،‫ درﺟﻪ ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‬5 ‫ﻣﺤﻜﻢ از‬
‫ ﺷﻴﺐ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﻛﻤﻲ‬،(‫ﺳﺮاﺷﻴﺐ )ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي داراي ﺷﻴﺐ ﺳﺮازﻳﺮ‬
.‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
With packages having good firm bottoms, the
maximum incline should not exceed 5 degrees;
however, on declining conveyors, the slope can be
slightly greater.
(‫ ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ )ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻦ ﻫﺎ‬6-5
5.6 Take-Ups
‫ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ در ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﻧﻮع ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ و در ﻫﻤﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ﺟﺒﺮان ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات در ﻃﻮل ﺗﺴﻤﻪ و ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺸﺶ در ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻣﻮرد‬
‫ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ در ﻫﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬.‫ﻧﻴﺎز ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫در اﻣﺘﺪاد ﻃﻮل ﺗﺴﻤﻪ در ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ آن ﭘﺲ از ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه ﻳﺎ‬
Take-Ups are required only on continuous type
chain driven and on all belt driven live roller
conveyors to compensate for changes in belt
length and to maintain belt tension. Take-up
devices may be located at any point along the
return run of the belt after the drive or at the tail
40
‫)‪IPS-M-GN-210(1‬‬
‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ ‪Mar. 2009/ 1388‬‬
‫‪pulley. The most desirable take-up location is‬‬
‫‪immediately adjacent to the drive, on the slack‬‬
‫‪belt side. See Figs. 2.3.a through 2.3.d for typical‬‬
‫‪side elevations.‬‬
‫در ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﻗﺮه ﺑﺮﮔﺮدان ﻗﺮار داده ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﻠﻮب ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺮاي وﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﻨﺎر ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه‪ ،‬در ﻃﺮف ﺷﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻫﺎي ‪ 3-2‬اﻟﻒ ﺗﺎ ‪-3-2‬د‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ ﻃﻮري ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ ‪ 50‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي‪ ،‬دﺳﺖ ﻛﻢ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻳﻚ درﺻﺪ‬
‫ﻃﻮل ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﻗﺮه ﻫﺎي اﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫را ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺴﻤﻪﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه از ﻛﺮﺑﺎس ﺑﺨﻴﻪ ﺧﻮرده‪ ،‬ﭘﻨﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪه ﺗﻮﭘﺮ و ﻳﻜﭙﺎرﭼﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﭘﻲ وي ﺳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﺪ ﭘﻠﻲ اﺳﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪه ﺗﻮﭘﺮ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎً ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ اﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Take-ups should be designed to provide a‬‬
‫‪movement of at least one percent of the conveyor‬‬
‫‪length measured between end pulleys with a travel‬‬
‫‪of 50 mm as a minimum.‬‬
‫‪Additional movement is generally required for‬‬
‫‪belts constructed from stitched canvas, solid‬‬
‫‪woven cotton, or PVC with solid woven polyster‬‬
‫‪carcass.‬‬
‫در ﻫﻤﻪ ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎي ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‪ ،‬ﺑﺠﺰ ﻧﻮع ﻋﻤﻮدي آﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاﺷﺘﻦ ﻗﺮﻗﺮه ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻋﻤﻮد ﺑﺮ ﻣﺤﻮر ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ‬
‫وﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻧﻴﺎز ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬وﺳﻴﻠﻪ اي ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺮات ﻣﻮرد‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻤﻮد ﻛﻨﻨﺪه اي اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ دو‬
‫ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎي ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه را ﻓﺸﺎر ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻫﻲ از ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﻨﺎم "وﺻﻠﻪ" را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬
‫اﺻﻠﻲ وﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺮد ﺗﺎ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﻌﻤﻮل ﭘﺲ از اﻧﺠﺎم ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ آﻧﺮا از ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮد‪ .‬ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن "وﺻﻠﻪ"‬
‫اﺟﺎزه ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ آﻏﺎزﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮﮔﺮدد‪.‬‬
‫‪On all automatic take-ups, except vertical type,‬‬
‫‪some mechanical device is desirable to keep the‬‬
‫‪take-up pulley square with the axis of the belt. A‬‬
‫‪device frequently employed is a squaring shaft,‬‬
‫‪which forces both take-up shaft bearings to travel‬‬
‫‪on equal amount.‬‬
‫‪A short piece of belt called “Dutchman” can be‬‬
‫‪spliced into a main belt to be conventionally‬‬
‫‪removed after all mechanical take-up has been‬‬
‫‪used. The removal of the “Dutchman” allows‬‬
‫‪mechanical take-up to return to starting position.‬‬
‫‪ 7-5‬آراﻳﺶ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه‬
‫‪5.7 Drive Arrangement‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﻫﺎي زﻳﺎدي در آراﻳﺶ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪهﻫﺎ وﺟﻮد دارد‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
‫دﻧﺪهاي )ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪه ﺳﺮﻋﺖ( از ﻣﺘﺪاوﻟﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻮع آن ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻳﺎد ﺷﺪه ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺟﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه)ﺟﻔﺖ ﻛﻦ( ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﻧﻌﻄﺎف ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪه ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ از ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻫﻨﺪه ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ در ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪه ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ را ﻣﻴﺘﻮان ﺑﺼﻮرت ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻳﻜﺴﻮﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎي‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﻠﻴﻜﻮن )‪ (SCR‬ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ داد‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﮓ زدن ﻗﺮﻗﺮه و زاوﻳﻪ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ از ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﻣﻬﻢ‬
‫در ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪There are many variations in drive arrangements.‬‬
‫‪A gearmotor is the most common type. The output‬‬
‫‪shaft of this unit is connected to the head or drive‬‬
‫‪shaft by a chain drive or flexible coupling. A‬‬
‫‪motor and reducer are sometimes used.‬‬
‫‪When variable speed is required, a mechanical‬‬
‫‪speed changer between motor and reducer may be‬‬
‫‪used.‬‬
‫‪Electrically, the speed may be changed using SCR‬‬
‫‪or variable frequency drives.‬‬
‫‪Important considerations in the design of belt‬‬
‫‪driven live roller conveyor are pulley lagging and‬‬
‫‪the angle of belt wrap.‬‬
‫‪41‬‬
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ﻟﻨﮓ زدن ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻛﺸﺶ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ زاوﻳﻪ‬.‫ﭘﺮﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ و ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ آﻻت ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ از ﻗﺮﻗﺮه ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮزﮔﺮدﻫﺎي ﻛﻤﺎنﮔﺴﺘﺮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
،‫در ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻧﻮع ﻏﻠﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻠﺖ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﻣﻴﺸﻮد ﺑﺮاي ﻧﮕﻬﺪاﺷﺘﻦ ﻛﺸﺶ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ در ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺪ‬
‫ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه در ﻣﺤﻞ‬،(‫اﻟﻒ‬-4-2 ‫)ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪهﻫﺎي اﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ را‬.‫ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻗﺮار داده ﺷﻮد‬
-2 ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮان در ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﻛﻮﺗﺎه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
.(‫ب‬-4
Lagging increases the lift of the belt and
machinery by reducing belt tension. Snub idlers or
pulleys are used to increase the angle of wrap.
On roll-to-roll type chain driven live roller
conveyor, it is recommended that the drive unit be
located near the center of the conveyor to keep the
chain pull to a minimum (Fig. 2.4.a). On short
conveyors, end drives may be used (Fig. 2.4.b).
‫ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎ‬8-5
5.8 Supports
‫ از‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ و ﻳﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎي ﻳﻜﺴﺎن ﺑﻌﻨﻮان ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ‬
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﺑﺮ روي‬.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
‫آن و در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﻣﻮارد ﺑﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ‬
‫ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻨﺤﻮي ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎب را‬.‫دارد‬
‫ ﻗﺎب ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه‬.(4-5 ‫ ﺑﻨﺪ‬1 ‫ﻣﺤﺪود ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ‬
AISC ‫اﺟﺰاء ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ آﻻت ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
The same type of supports are used for chain
driven and belt driven live roller conveyors as for
roller conveyor. Support spacing is dependent on
the loading and, in some cases, on the building
construction. Supports must be spaced to limit
frame deflection (see Part 1 Clause 5.4). The
frame for supporting the machinery components
of the conveyor shall be designed in accordance
with AISC Standard.
(‫ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل دﻫﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ )ﺗﺮاﮔﺬارﻫﺎ‬9-5
5.9 Transfers
‫ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل دﻫﻨﺪهﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه‬1-9-5
5.9.1 Transfers for chain driven conveyors
‫ﺑﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
‫اﻧﻮاع ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮن و زﻳﺎدي از اﻧﺘﻘﺎل دﻫﻨﺪهﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﺑﺮ‬
‫روي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎ و ﺑﺎرﺑﺮداري از روي آﻧﻬﺎ در ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎهﻫﺎي ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬
.‫وﺟﻮد دارﻧﺪ‬
There are many types and variations of transfers
used with chain driven live roller conveyor to
transfer loads onto or off the conveyor at
intermediate positions:
1) Gravity roller curve, used at ends of
conveyor.
‫( ﻗﻮس ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﮔﺮاﻧﺸﻲ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در دو ﺳﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ‬1
2) Disappearing pitched gravity roller section,
where several lanes of idler rollers are set at
right angles to the carrying rollers and are
raised and lowered manually or by a power
device (see Fig. 2.8).
‫ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ‬،‫( ﺑﺨﺶ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﮔﺮاﻧﺸﻲ ﺷﻴﺐ دار ﻧﺎﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه‬2
3) The disappearing roller section may be
horizontal, instead of pitched gravity, and
equipped with a powered pusher to transfer
loads at right angle to the direction of main
conveyor(see Figs.2.9 to 2.16).
‫( ﺑﺨﺶ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﻧﺎﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺠﺎي ﮔﺮاﻧﺸﻲ‬3
‫ اﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﻘﺎل دادن ﺑﺎر ﻋﻤﻮد ﺑﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ‬،‫ﺷﻴﺐ دار‬
‫ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻞ دﻫﻨﺪه ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﻧﮕﺎه‬،‫اﺻﻠﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬
( 16-2 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬9-2 ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎي‬
4) Disappearing chain transfer has several
strands of chains set parallel to the carrying
rollers and between the carrying rollers. Chains
are usually driven by a gearmotor and are
‫( اﻧﺘﻘﺎل دﻫﻨﺪه زﻧﺠﻴﺮي ﻧﺎﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه داراي ﭼﻨﺪ رﺷﺘﻪ‬4
‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺼﻮرت ﻣﻮازي ﺑﺎ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ و‬
ً‫ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ‬.‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﻏﻠﺘﻚﻫﺎي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر دﻧﺪه اي )ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪه ﺳﺮﻋﺖ( ﮔﺮداﻧﺪه ﺷﺪه‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ردﻳﻒ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺮزﮔﺮد ﻋﻤﻮد ﺑﺮ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺮار داده ﺷﺪه و ﺑﺼﻮرت دﺳﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ و‬
.(8-2 ‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮده ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
42
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
normally raised and lowered by pneumatics or
hydraulics (see Fig. 2.15).
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫و ﺑﺼﻮرت ﻋﺎدي ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر آب )ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ( ﻳﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻫﻮا ﺑﺎﻻ و‬
.(15-2 ‫ )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬.‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮده ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫( ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﺳﺒﻚ را ﻣﻴﺘﻮان ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از وﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل‬5
5) Light loads may be pushed off the chain
driven live roller conveyor at right angles to
the direction of travel by means of a powered
push-off device without the disappearing roller
transfer feature. A disappearing plate stop is
normally used in this application to stop the
travel of the load and position it while being
transferred; or the main conveyor may be
stopped during the “push transfer” cycle (see
Fig.2.14).
‫ ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻫﻞ دﻫﻨﺪه‬،‫دﻫﻨﺪه ﻳﺎ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻧﺎﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻮد ﺑﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎر ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ از روي‬
‫ در اﻳﻦ‬.‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﺮد‬
‫ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ" ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎر و وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ ﻳﻚ ورﻗﻪ‬،‫دادن ﺑﻪ آن در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل داده ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
‫ﻧﺎﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد؛ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ اﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫را در ﺳﻴﻜﻞ "اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻓﺸﺎري" ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﺮد )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ‬
.(14-2 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫( ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﺳﺒﻚ را ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ وﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﺞ‬6
6) Light loads may also be deflected off the
chain driven live roller conveyor by means of a
fixed, manually operated, or power operated
deflector consisting of a bar pivoted to swing
out over the conveyor( see Figs. 2.11 and
2.13).
‫ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه دﺳﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ‬،‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺷﻨﻪ دار ﻛﻪ روي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﺗﺎب ﻣﻴﺨﻮرد از روي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ‬
-2 ‫ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺎر زد )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞﻫﺎي‬
.(13-2 ‫ و‬11
‫( ﺷﺎﺧﻪ)اﻧﺸﻌﺎب( ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ‬7
7) A chain driven live roller spur is a section of
conveyor set at approximately 30 degrees to
the direction of travel of the main conveyor;
with odd length rollers as required to mate with
the side of the main conveyor. It is used to
transfer loads onto a conveyor, or it may also
be used to transfer loads off a powered
conveyor with the use of a deflector (see
Figs.2.11 and 2.12).
‫اﺳﺖ از ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮل ﻫﺎي‬
‫ ﺑﺎ‬،‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﻻزم ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻔﺖ و ﺟﻮر ﺷﺪن ﺑﺎ ﻛﻨﺎر ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ اﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫ درﺟﻪ در ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ اﺻﻠﻲ ﻗﺮار‬30 ً‫زاوﻳﻪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬
‫ از ﺷﺎﺧﻪ)اﻧﺸﻌﺎب( ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﺑﺮ روي‬،‫ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از‬،‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
‫ﻛﺞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎرﺑﺮداري از روي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺑﻜﺎر‬
(12-2‫و‬11-2‫رود )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞﻫﺎي‬
‫ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل دﻫﻨﺪهﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ‬2-9-5
5.9.2 Transfers for belt driven conveyors
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬
Spur-Probably the most universally used transfer
between belt driven live roller conveyors is the
gravity curve, either roller or wheel type. For
intermediate receiving or feeding, a spur section
of roller or wheel conveyor is used at an angle of
approximately 30 degrees to the direction of travel
of the through conveyor. The tapered portion of
the transfer is fitted with varying length rollers or
with a series of wheels or casters. The rollers in
this section may also be power driven (see Figs.
2.10 a and b).
‫ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل دﻫﻨﺪه اي ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ‬-(‫ﺷﺎﺧﻪ)اﻧﺸﻌﺎب‬
،‫ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد را ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ دارد‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻳﺎ‬.‫ﻗﻮس ﮔﺮاﻧﺸﻲ از ﻧﻮع ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎر از ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ اي از ﻧﻮع ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ درﺟﻪ در ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬30 ً‫ﭼﺮﺧﻲ ﺑﺎ زاوﻳﻪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬
،‫ در ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺎرﻳﻚ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل دﻫﻨﺪه‬.‫ﺳﺮاﺳﺮي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮل ﻣﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮيﻫﺎﻳﻲ از ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﮕﻮاره‬
‫ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ در اﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ‬.‫ﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
.(‫اﻟﻒ و ب‬-10-2 ‫ﺑﺮق ﮔﺮداﻧﺪه ﺷﻮﻧﺪ )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎي‬
Right angle-The simplest form of power transfer
is the right angle one, where the feed line is
brought in at a right angle to the main line and a
turning wheel or roller is used to assist the load in
negotiating the turn (see Fig. 210 c). Such an
arrangement works very well if there is always
sufficient space between unit loads to permit one
‫راﺳﺖ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ – راﺳﺖ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺳﺎده ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل دﻫﻨﺪه‬
‫ درﺟﻪ( ﺑﻪ‬90) ‫ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ راﺳﺖ‬،‫ﺑﺮﻗﻲ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺧﻂ اﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻴﮕﺮدد و از ﻳﻚ ﭼﺮخ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دادن ﺑﺎر ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﭘﻴﭻ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻴﺸﻮد )ﻧﮕﺎه‬
‫ اﮔﺮ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻓﻀﺎي ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي‬.(‫ ج‬-10-2 ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻲ ﺑﺮاي اﻣﻜﺎن ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دادن ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎر ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻗﺒﻞ از‬
43
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
unit load to negotiate the turn before the next one
arrives.
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ آراﻳﺸﻲ ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮد ﺑﺴﻴﺎر‬،‫ورود ﺑﺎر دﻳﮕﺮ وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داﺷﺖ‬
‫ ﻛﺞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪهﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬-‫ﻛﺞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
Deflectors- Deflectors are not recommended for
heavy loads. There are a number of different types
of deflectors in use, the simplest being straight or
curved bars set at an angle to the direction of
travel to move the package to one side as it slides
along the bar. These bars may be faced with
special friction reducing materials. They are
sometimes lined with closely spaced ball bearing
wheels. Another type employs a motor driven flat
or V-belt set in a vertical plane and backed-up by
a supporting structure. The moving belt causes the
package to discharge positively from the
conveyor.
،‫ اﻧﻮاع ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ از ﻛﺞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ ﺑﻜﺎر ﻣﻴﺮوﻧﺪ‬.‫ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺳﺎدهﺗﺮﻳﻦ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي راﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻤﻴﺪه اﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ زاوﻳﻪ در‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﺮار داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ را در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ در‬
‫ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻳﻦ‬.‫اﻣﺘﺪاد ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﻲ رود ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻛﻨﺎر ﺑﺰﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ از ﻣﻮاد ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪه ﻣﺎﻟﺶ )اﺻﻄﻜﺎك( ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪه‬
‫ آﻧﻬﺎ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﻬﺎي ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﻬﻢ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن دار‬.‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻧﻮع دﻳﮕﺮي از آﻧﻬﺎ داراي ﺗﺴﻤﻪاي اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ‬.‫ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪه ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎي ﺻﺎف ﻳﺎ ﺷﻴﺎردار ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺼﻮرت ﻋﻤﻮدي‬
‫ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ در‬.‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ و ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎزه ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺎل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻛﺎﻣﻞ از ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬
.‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﻛﺞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ را ﺑﺎ ﺳﻮار ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺮ روي ﺧﺎرﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻮدي‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮان ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮداﺷﺖ ﻛﺮد ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮ روي ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻮدي ﻟﻮﻻ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺎ اﻫﺮم ﻫﺎي دﺳﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ از راه‬.‫ﻛﺮد‬
‫ ﻣﻮﺗﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪه ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻳﺎ‬،‫دور ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪرﻫﺎي ﻫﻮا‬
.‫وﺳﺎﻳﻞ دﻳﮕﺮي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﺮد‬
The deflectors may be made removable by
mounting on vertical pins or may be hinged on
vertical shafts. Control may be provided by hand
levers or remotely by means of air cylinders, gear
motors or other devices.
‫ وﺳﻴﻠﻪاي اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻫﻞ دادن ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎر‬-‫ﻫﻞ دﻫﻨﺪه‬
Push-off-A device used to physically push unit
load off to other lines (usually at 90 degrees).
Push-offs are normally air powered or motordriven, controlled electrically by photo eyes or
limit switches (see Fig. 2.16).
(‫ درﺟﻪ‬90 ‫ﺗﻜﻲ از ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻄﻮط دﻳﮕﺮ )ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺎ زاوﻳﻪ‬
‫ ﻫﻞ دﻫﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻫﻮا ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﮔﺮداﻧﺪه ﺷﺪه و ﺑﺎ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻓﺘﻮاﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي‬
.(16-2 ‫ﺣﺪﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ)ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ ﻗﻮس ﻫﺎي اﻓﻘﻲ‬10-5
5.10 Horizontal Curves
‫ﻗﻮس ﻫﺎي اﻓﻘﻲ را ﻣﻴﺘﻮان ﺑﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ روش ﻏﻠﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ در ﻗﻮس ﻫﺎي ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ‬.‫ﻏﻠﺖ ﮔﺮداﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﺮ و ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي‬،(‫ج‬-4-2 ‫)ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ ز و ح( ﺑﺮ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از دو اﻧﺘﻬﺎي‬-4-2 ‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ )ﺷﻜﻞ ﻫﺎي‬
‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد در ﻗﻮس ﻫﺎي داراي‬.‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺳﻮار ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‬
‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ از زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﻧﻌﻄﺎف وﻳﮋه ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي‬
.‫ﻧﺎزك داراي دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي ردﻳﻔﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ در ﻧﻮع ﻏﻠﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻠﺖ ﺑﺮ روي اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ‬
‫ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﻠﺖ‬.(‫و و ز‬-5-2 ‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺳﻮار ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ )ﺷﻜﻞ ﻫﺎي‬
‫ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬،‫اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺼﻮرت ﻳﻚ ﻗﻮس داﻳﺮه ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻢ راﺳﺘﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ و ﻟﺬا اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع ﻛﻨﺘﺮل زاوﻳﻪ داري آﻧﻬﺎ را‬
:‫ ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺸﺮح زﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬.‫ﻣﻬﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺳﺎزد‬
Horizontal curves can be powered by a continuous
chain or by the roll-to-roll method. On continuous
chain curves (Fig. 2.4.c) the sprockets are
mounted on either end of the rollers, depending on
the diameter and spacing of the rollers (Figs. 2.4.g
and .h). A special flexible chain with thin, rack
tooth sprockets should be used on the continuous
chain curve.
On the roll-to-roll type, the sprockets are mounted
on the outside end of the rollers (Figs. 2.5.f and
g). Because the chain acts as the chord of a circle,
it is not in line with its sprockets, making it
important that the angularity be controlled. The
controlling factors are:
3 ‫( ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ زاوﻳﻪاي ﺑﻴﻦ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻣﺤﺪود ﺑﻪ‬1
1) The angular spacing between the rollers,
usually limited to 3 degrees.
.‫درﺟﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫( ﺷﻌﺎع ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ‬2
2) The radius of the outside rail.
44
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
.‫( ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ روي ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ‬3
3) Center distance of rollers on outside rail.
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ ﺑﮕﻮﻧﻪاي ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع ﻛﺎر‬.‫ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ از ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ آزاد ﻻزم ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه را ﺑﻬﺒﻮد ﻣﻲ ﺑﺨﺸﺪ زﻳﺮا ﻣﺎﻟﺶ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺎري زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
‫ در‬.‫را ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪاﻧﻪﻫﺎي ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻲ رﺳﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه ﻏﻠﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻠﺖ از زﻧﺠﻴﺮ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد و ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي‬
.‫ﻧﺎزك داراي دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻗﻮس ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ‬
180 ‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي داراي ﻧﻤﺎي راﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎرﻳﻚ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ زاوﻳﻪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ ﻗﻮس ﻫﺎي‬.(6-2 ‫درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﻮص را ﻣﻴﺘﻮان ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ درﺟﻪ ﻻزم ﺑﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪون ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻣﻤﺎﺳﻲ‬
.‫در اﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬
‫ﻗﻮس ﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎً ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ داراي ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ذوزﻧﻘﻪاي ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮع ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻗﻮسﻫﺎ ﺑﻄﻮر ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬.‫آن ﮔﺮداﻧﺪه ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ آن ﻫﺎ داراي ﻗﺪرت ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ و‬
.‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
These factors should be selected so there will be
no more clearance than necessary between the
sprockets. This condition will improve the
operation because it minimizes the rubbing of the
chain side links against the sprocket teeth.
Standard chain and thin sprockets with regular
teeth are used on the roll-to roll drive.
Belt driven live roller curves with straight face or
tapered rollers are made up to 180 degrees (See
Fig. 2.6). Special curves can be made for any
degree required with or without tangents on ends.
Curves are generally driven by V-belt or similar
type belt. They are powered separately or from
connecting conveyors, and can be reversible.
‫ ﺗﻌﺎرﻳﻒ وﻳﮋه ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬11-5
5.11 Specific Definitions for Belting
‫ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﺪ‬1-11-5
5.11.1 Carcass
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻛﺸﺶ در ﻣﺎده ﺑﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺗﺴﻤﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﺑﻄﻮرﻳﻜﻪ از ﭘﻮﺷﺶ آن ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
The fabric tension carrying portion of a belt, as
distinguished from the cover.
‫ داك‬2-11-5
5.11.2 Duck
‫واژهاي اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي داﻣﻨﻪ وﺳﻴﻌﻲ از ﻣﻮاد ﺑﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ داك‬.‫ﻛﺮﺑﺎس ﻳﺎ ﻛﺘﺎن( ﺑﺎ وزن ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺑﻜﺎر ﻣﻴﺮود‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً از ﭘﻨﺒﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮاد ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و در ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬
.‫ﻛﺎﻟﺒﺪ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
A term applied to a wide range of medium and
heavy weight fabrics, commonly made of cotton
or synthetic material, used to construct a conveyor
belt carcass.
‫ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺎﻟﺸﻲ‬3-11-5
5.11.3 Friction surface
‫ﻣﺎده ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﭼﺴﺒﻨﺪه ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي اﻳﺠﺎد ﻛﺸﺶ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺶ از ﺣﺪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮل ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮاد ﺑﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ اﻋﻤﺎل‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و آﻧﺮا آﻏﺸﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
A rubber adhesive compound applied to and
impregnating a conveyor belt fabric, to provide
greater than normal traction.
‫ ﻻﻳﻪ‬4-11-5
5.11.4 Ply
‫ﻻﻳﻪاي از داك ﻳﺎ ﻗﻴﻄﺎنﻫﺎﺋﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ در ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
A layer of duck or cords used in constructing the
carcass of a conveyor belt. .
‫ اﻧﺪود روﻳﻪ‬5-11-5
5.11.5 Skim or skim coat
‫ﻻﻳﻪاي از ﻣﻮادي اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ روي ﻣﻮاد ﺑﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﻜﺎر‬
.‫ﺑﺮده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ وﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﻪ درون ﺑﺎﻓﺖ راﻧﺪه ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
A layer of material applied to the belt fabric but
not forced into the weave.
‫ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻫﺎ‬6-11-5
5.11.6 Covers
‫ ﺑﺮاي‬،‫ﻣﻮادي ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﺪ و در ﺟﺎي ﻻزم‬
‫ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻛﺮدن ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎت ﻣﺎﻟﺸﻲ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر وﻳﮋه ﺑﺮ ﺳﻄﻮح‬
Material applied to the outer surfaces of a
conveyor belt for protection of the carcass and,
where required, to provide special load carrying
45
‫)‪IPS-M-GN-210(1‬‬
‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ ‪Mar. 2009/ 1388‬‬
‫‪frictional characteristics.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﻜﺎر ﻣﻲ روﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 7-11-5‬ﻟﺒﻪ ﺧﺎم‬
‫‪5.11.7 Raw edge‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﻪ ﭼﺎرﮔﻮش ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻧﺸﺪه ﺗﺴﻤﻪ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻳﺪن ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﭘﺲ‬
‫از ﺳﺨﺖ ﻛﺮدن آن ﺑﻮﺟﻮد ﻣﻲ آﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪The uncovered square edge of a belt created by‬‬
‫‪cutting after vulcanization.‬‬
‫‪ 8-11-5‬ﻟﺒﻪ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺷﺪه‬
‫‪5.11.8 Cemented edge‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺧﺎم ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻳﺪه ﺷﺪه ﺗﺴﻤﻪاي ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از‬
‫ﭼﺴﺐ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮاد آب ﺑﻨﺪي دﻳﮕﺮ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪An application of rubber cement or other edge‬‬
‫‪sealant over the raw or cut edge of a belt.‬‬
‫‪ 9-11-5‬ﻟﺒﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺮده‬
‫‪5.11.9 Folded edge‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ در آن ﻳﻜﻲ از ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪن ﻟﺒﻪﻫﺎي ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺮاﻣﻮن ﻛﺎﻟﺒﺪ آن ﺗﺎ زده‬
‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪A belt construction wherein an outer ply is folded‬‬
‫‪around a carcass so as to cover the edges.‬‬
‫‪ 10-11-5‬اﺗﺼﺎل )ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ(‬
‫‪5.11.10 Splice‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‪ -‬اﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻬﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ دو اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﻣﻮاد‬
‫‪Mechanical- A joint made by fastening two ends‬‬
‫‪of belting together by means of metal hooks or‬‬
‫‪plates.‬‬
‫ﺳﺨﺖ ﺷﺪه– اﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺨﺖ ﮔﺮداﻧﻲ دو اﻧﺘﻬﺎي‬
‫‪Vulcanized- A joint made endless by means of‬‬
‫‪vulcanizing two properly prepared ends of the‬‬
‫‪belt.‬‬
‫ﭘﻠﻪاي‪ -‬در اﻳﻦ ﻧﻮع اﺗﺼﺎل‪ ،‬ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻮﺟﻮد آﻣﺪن اﻣﻜﺎن‬
‫ﻫﻤﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻲ و ﭼﺴﺒﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﻻﻳﻪ در ﻫﺮ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎً ﻋﻘﺐ ﺗﺮ از ﻻﻳﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪه ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‪.‬‬
‫اﻧﮕﺸﺘﻲ‪ -‬ﻫﺮ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ اﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﻳﺪه ﺷﺪه و‬
‫‪Step- Each ply is cut back further than the‬‬
‫‪previous on each end to allow overlapping and‬‬
‫‪bonding of the plies.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺳﺎزي ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ورﻗﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻓﻠﺰي اﻳﺠﺎد ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ آﻣﺎده ﺷﺪه ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ آﻧﺮا ﺑﻲ اﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Finger- Each end is cut in a long finger pattern‬‬
‫‪and bonded to allow maximum flexibility.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻳﺠﺎد اﻧﻌﻄﺎف ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﻬﻢ ﭼﺴﺒﺎﻧﺪه ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ 11-11-5‬اﻧﻮاع ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه‬
‫‪5.11.11 Types of belt for belt driven live rollers‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺗﻚ رﺷﺘﻪ اي‪ -‬ﺗﺴﻤﻪاي اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ در آن رﺷﺘﻪ ﻫﺎي‬
‫‪Belt, monofilament - A belt utilizing many single‬‬
‫‪strands of untwisted synthetic fiber.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻻﻳﻪاي‪ -‬در اﻳﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﺪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺎ ﺑﻬﻢ‬
‫‪Multiple ply-Carcass is usually made with three‬‬
‫‪or more plies of fabric bonded together by‬‬
‫‪elastometric material. May be furnished smooth‬‬
‫‪covers top and bottom, rough-top, friction-surface,‬‬
‫‪bareback, or combinations using one type of‬‬
‫‪surface for one side of the belt and another type of‬‬
‫‪surface for the other side.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻲ زﻳﺎدي از اﻟﻴﺎف ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﺗﺎﺑﻴﺪه ﻧﺸﺪه ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺴﺒﺎﻧﺪن ﺳﻪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻣﻮاد ﺑﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮاد ارﺗﺠﺎﻋﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻪﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻫﺎي ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫روﻳﻪ و ﺳﻄﺢ زﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﺻﺎف‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﺢ روﻳﻪ ﺧﺸﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﺢ روﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻟﺸﻲ‪ ،‬ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﻲ روﻛﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در آﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮع‬
‫روﻳﻪ در ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮف ﺗﺴﻤﻪ و ﻧﻮع دﻳﮕﺮي از روﻳﻪ در ﻃﺮف دﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻛﻢ ﻻﻳﻪ‪ -‬در اﻳﻦ ﻧﻮع ﺗﺴﻤﻪ وﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎي ﻻزم ﻛﺎﻟﺒﺪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪Reduced‬‬
‫‪ply‬‬‫‪The‬‬
‫‪necessary‬‬
‫‪carcass‬‬
‫‪characteristics are obtained using fewer plies than‬‬
‫‪comparable multiple-ply belts.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻤﺘﺮي ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آﻣﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻟﺒﺪ را ﻣﻴﺘﻮان از ﻳﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ واﺣﺪ ﻳﺎ از ﭼﻨﺪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً دو‬
‫‪The carcass may be made as a single unit or from‬‬
‫‪46‬‬
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
plies, usually two, of nylon, polyester, or
combinations of these synthetics. When more than
one ply is used, they are bonded together as in
multiple-ply belts but with heavier skim coat
between the plies. Covers available are similar to
those for multiple-ply belts.
‫ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ از اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮاد ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﻲ اﺳﺖ‬،‫ ﭘﻠﻲ اﺳﺘﺮ‬،‫ﻻﻳﻪ آن ﻧﺎﻳﻠﻨﻲ‬
‫ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ‬،‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از ﻳﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬.‫ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﻤﻪﻫﺎي ﭼﻨﺪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺑﻬﻢ ﭼﺴﺒﺎﻧﺪه ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ وﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ اﻧﺪود‬
‫ ﭘﻮﺷﺶﻫﺎي ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ‬،‫روﻛﺶ ﺿﺨﻴﻢ ﺗﺮ در ﺑﻴﻦ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
.‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺴﻤﻪﻫﺎي ﭼﻨﺪ ﻻﻳﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
Ripple belt- A special belt with raised pads
spaced at uniform intervals along its length. Only
the pad surface contacts the carrier rollers.
‫ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ وﻳﮋهاي اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ‬-‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﭼﻴﻦ دار‬
.‫ﻛﻪ در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻳﻜﻨﻮاﺧﺖ در اﻣﺘﺪاد ﻃﻮل آن اﻳﺠﺎد ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‬
‫در اﻳﻦ ﻧﻮع ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬
.‫ﺗﻤﺎس ﭘﻴﺪا ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻻﻳﻪﻫﺎﻳﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ از ﻧﺨﻬﺎي‬-‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻨﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻮﭘﺮ‬
Solid woven cotton- Layers of warp threads are
woven with layers of filler threads and bound
together in the loom with binder threads. There
are no distinct plies, but the layers of warp threads
are often counted as piles. They may be used with
or without treatment or impregnation.
‫ﺗﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ از ﻧﺨﻬﺎي ﭘﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﻬﻢ ﺑﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ و در‬
‫ در اﻳﻦ‬.‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻓﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺦ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎﻛﻮ ﺑﻬﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻲ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد وﻟﻲ ﻻﻳﻪﻫﺎي ﻧﺦ ﺗﺎر‬
‫ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻳﺎ‬.‫اﻏﻠﺐ ﺑﻌﻨﻮان ﭘﺮزﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺎب ﻣﻲ آﻳﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺪون ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻳﺎ آﻏﺸﺘﻪ ﺳﺎزي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
Solid woven PVC- Single–ply, solid woven
carcass made from nylon, polyester, or
combinations thereof, impregnated and coated
with PVC (polyvinyl-chloride) plastic.
‫ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﺪ‬- ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻮﭘﺮ داراي ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﭘﻲ وي ﺳﻲ‬
Stitched canvas- Several plies of the fabrics
(usually cotton duck) are stitched together and
normally treated by immersion in special
compounds.
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻮك زدن ﭼﻨﺪ ﻻﻳﻪ از ﻣﻮاد‬-‫ﻛﺮﺑﺎس ﺑﺨﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه‬
V-belt- A belt with a cross section in the general
shape of a trapezoid.
‫ ﺗﺴﻤﻪاي اﺳﺖ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻛﻠﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﺑﻪ‬-‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ذوزﻧﻘﻪ‬
Specifications and testing methods for various
belting materials can be found in one of the
following references:
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت و روﺷﻬﺎي آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻮاد ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺳﺎزي‬
:‫را ﻣﻴﺘﻮان در ﻳﻜﻲ از ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ زﻳﺮ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
ASTM D 413
‫ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ از آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ‬،‫ ﭘﻠﻲ اﺳﺘﺮ‬،‫ﺗﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ از ﻧﺎﻳﻠﻮن‬
‫ و ﺑﺎ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﭘﻲ وي ﺳﻲ )ﻛﻠﺮﻳﺪ‬،‫ﺻﻮرت ﺗﻮﭘﺮ ﺑﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﭘﻠﻲ وﻳﻨﻴﻞ( آﻏﺸﺘﻪ و ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
‫ﺑﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻬﻢ )ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً داك ﭘﻨﺒﻪاي( ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺎ‬
.‫آﻏﺸﺘﻪ ﻛﺮدن آن ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎت وﻳﮋه ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺷﻜﻞ ذوزﻧﻘﻪ‬
"Method for Testing Rubber
Property Adhesive to Flexible
Substrates "
ASTM D 378
"Method for Testing Rubber
Belting, Flat Type"
ASTM D 430
"Methods of Dynamic Testing
for Ply Separation and
Cracking of Rubber Products"
47
‫"روش آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﭼﺴﺒﻨﺪﮔﻲ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
"‫اﻧﻌﻄﺎف‬
،‫"روش آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺴﻤﻪﻫﺎي ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ‬
"‫ﻧﻮع ﺗﺨﺖ‬
ASTM D 413
‫"روشﻫﺎي آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﻮﻳﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ﺟﺪاﻳﺶ ﻻﻳﻪ و ﺗﺮك ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ‬
"‫ﻓﺮآورده ﻫﺎي ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ‬
ASTM D 430
ASTM D 378
‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ ‪Mar. 2009/ 1388‬‬
‫)‪IPS-M-GN-210(1‬‬
‫‪HORIZONTAL BELT DRIVEN LIVE ROLLER CONVEYORS TYPICAL SIDE ELEVATIONS‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎي ﻧﻴﻤﺮخ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ اﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎر‬
‫ﻗﺮﻗﺮه دم اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﺪه‬
‫ﺑﻌﻨﻮان ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫ﻗﺮﻗﺮه اﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه‬
‫)اﻟﻒ(‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎر‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻗﺮه دم‬
‫ﻗﺮﻗﺮه اﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه‬
‫ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه اﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫)ب (‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎر‬
‫ﻗﺮﻗﺮه دم‬
‫ﻗﺮﻗﺮه اﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه‬
‫ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻋﻤﻮدي‬
‫)ج (‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎر‬
‫ﻗﺮﻗﺮه اﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻗﺮه اﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه و ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫)د (‬
‫‪Fig. 2.3‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪3-2‬‬
‫‪48‬‬
‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ ‪Mar. 2009/ 1388‬‬
‫)‪IPS-M-GN-210(1‬‬
‫‪CONTINUOUS CHAIN DRIVEN LIVE ROLLER CONVEYOR‬‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎل ﻫﺎي‬
‫ﻫﺪاﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬
‫ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪار‬
‫ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻦ‬
‫)اﻟﻒ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎل ﻫﺎي‬
‫ﻫﺪاﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎي‪A-A‬‬
‫)ب(‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ راﺳﺖ‬
‫و ﻗﻮﺳﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻮس ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﮔﺮداﻧﺪه‬
‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻧﻮع‬
‫ﻳﻚ رﺷﺘﻪ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ‬
‫)و(‬
‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﻣﻤﺎس در‬
‫ﻫﺮ اﻧﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎي زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
‫اﻧﺘﻬﺎي‬
‫ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه‬
‫ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه زﻧﺠﻴﺮ درﺷﻌﺎع‬
‫ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ ﻗﻮس‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎع‬
‫)ز(‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬
‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎي زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎي ﻧﻴﻤﺮخ ﻗﻮس ‪90‬‬
‫درﺟﻪ‬
‫)ج(‬
‫ﻳﻜﺮاﺳﺘﺎ ﺑﻮدن ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه زﻧﺠﻴﺮ درﺷﻌﺎع دروﻧﻲ ﻗﻮﺳﻲ‬
‫)ح(‬
‫)د(‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎي ﻧﻴﻤﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻬﻠﻮ‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬
‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎي زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻮس ﺑﺎ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎرﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه زﻧﺠﻴﺮدرﺷﻌﺎع‬
‫ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ آن‬
‫)ط(‬
‫)ﻫ(‬
‫‪Fig. 2.4‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪4-2‬‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎي ﻧﻴﻤﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ دو ﭘﻬﻠﻮ‬
‫)‪IPS-M-GN-210(1‬‬
‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ ‪Mar. 2009/ 1388‬‬
‫‪ROLL TO ROLL CHAIN DRIVEN LIVE ROLLER CONVEYOR‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻧﻮع ﻏﻠﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻠﺖ‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻔﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ‬
‫)اﻟﻒ(‬
‫ﺳﻔﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎه‬
‫)ب(‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ راﺳﺖ وﻗﻮس‬
‫ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﻫ(‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﺷﺪن‬
‫ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
‫)و(‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎي ﻧﻴﻤﺮخ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
‫ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﻪ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه‬
‫ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎع‬
‫ﻗﻮس ﻳﺎ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ‬
‫داراي ﻧﻤﺎي راﺳﺖ‬
‫)ج(‬
‫)ز(‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎي ﭘﻼن ﻗﻮس ‪ 90‬درﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻮس ﻳﺎ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺎرﻳﻚ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻏﻠﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻠﺖ‬
‫)د(‬
‫)ح(‬
‫‪Fig. 2.5‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪5-2‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ ‪Mar. 2009/ 1388‬‬
‫)‪IPS-M-GN-210(1‬‬
‫‪90° BELT DRIVEN LIVE ROLLER CURVE‬‬
‫ﻗﻮس ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ‪ 90‬درﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻗﺮه ﺷﻴﺎردار ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻦ‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎع ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ‬
‫ﮔﺮدش ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻗﺮه ﺷﻴﺎر دار ﻫﺮزﮔﺮد دم‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎع‬
‫دروﻧﻲ‬
‫‪ 90‬درﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﺑﺎرﻳﻚ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه‬
‫ﻗﺮﻗﺮه ﺷﻴﺎردار راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻃﻮل ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻗﺮه ﺷﻴﺎردار ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه‬
‫ﻗﺮﻗﺮه ﺷﻴﺎردار ﻓﺸﺎري‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‪V‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎي ﺑﺮش‪A-A‬‬
‫‪Fig. 2.6‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪6-2‬‬
‫‪Staggered sprockets driven by single strand‬‬
‫‪Of double width chain can sometimes be‬‬
‫‪used where very close centers are required‬‬
‫ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﻳﻚ در ﻣﻴﺎن ﮔﺮداﻧﺪه ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ رﺷﺘﻪ از‬
‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮ دو ﻋﺮض ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﺪ در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﻣﻮاﻗﻊ در ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ‬
‫ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪Fig. 2.7‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪7-2‬‬
‫‪51‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه‬
‫)‪IPS-M-GN-210(1‬‬
‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ ‪Mar. 2009/ 1388‬‬
‫‪DISAPPEARING PITCHED GRAVITY ROLLER SECTION TRANSFER‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل دﻫﻨﺪه ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﮔﺮاﻧﺸﻲ ﺷﻴﺐ دار ﻧﺎﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه‬
‫‪PLAN VIEW‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎي ﭘﻼن‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫‪Fig. 2.8‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪8-2‬‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫)‪IPS-M-GN-210(1‬‬
‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ ‪Mar. 2009/ 1388‬‬
‫‪RIGHT ANGLE CROSS CHAIN TRANSFER‬‬
‫اﻧﺘﻘﺎل دﻫﻨﺪه راﺳﺖ ﮔﻮش ﺑﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‬
‫‪PLAN VIEW‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎي ﭘﻼن‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫‪Fig. 2.9‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪9-2‬‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ ‪Mar. 2009/ 1388‬‬
‫)‪IPS-M-GN-210(1‬‬
‫‪BELT DRIVEN LIVE ROLLER TRANSFERS‬‬
‫اﻧﺘﻘﺎل دﻫﻨﺪه ﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬
‫زاوﻳﻪ ‪α‬‬
‫زاوﻳﻪ ‪α‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
‫ﭼﺮخ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ‬
‫ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮاﻧﺸﻲ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﻗﻮس ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ‬
‫ﮔﺮاﻧﺸﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
‫)‪2.10(b‬‬
‫)‪2.10(a‬‬
‫‪) 10-2‬ب(‬
‫‪) 10-2‬اﻟﻒ(‬
‫اﻟﻒ( اﻧﺘﻘﺎل دﻫﻨﺪه ﺑﺎر ادﻏﺎم ﺷﺪه ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪a) Intermediate merge loading transfer with‬‬
‫‪intersecting gravity or powered section. Used‬‬
‫‪for loading out to main line from spur line‬‬
‫‪conveyor. Suitable for individual or closely‬‬
‫‪spaced line load.‬‬
‫ﮔﺮاﻧﺸﻲ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎر از ﺧﻂ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ‬
‫)اﻧﺸﻌﺎب( ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ اﺻﻠﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎر‬
‫ﺗﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﺧﻂ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺑـﺎر از ﺧﻂ اﺻﻠﻲ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺑـﺮﻗﻲ ﺑﻪ روي‬
‫ﺷـﺎﺧﻪ) اﻧﺸﻌﺎب(‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ دو ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﺷﺪه و ﻛﺞ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪهﻫﺎي ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﺎر ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺗﺨﻴﻠﻲ در ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻣﻴﮕﺮدﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪When unloading from the main line live roller‬‬
‫‪onto spur, both conveyors are reversed and‬‬
‫‪deflectors are positioned as shown above in‬‬
‫‪phantom.‬‬
‫‪b) Similar to figure 2.10a except with positive‬‬
‫‪loading section. Less gap at transfer point is‬‬
‫‪particularly desirable for small loads. When‬‬
‫‪unloading from the main line roller bed onto‬‬
‫‪super line, both conveyors are reversed and‬‬
‫‪deflector is positioned as shown above in‬‬
‫‪phantom.‬‬
‫ب( اﻳﻦ ﻧﻮع اﻧﺘﻘﺎل دﻫﻨﺪه ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -10-2‬اﻟﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺟﺰ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ داراي ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﻣﺜﺒﺖ اﺳﺖ‪ .‬در‬
‫اﻳﻨﺠﺎ در ﻧﻘﻄﻪ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺑﺎر ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮي ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻧﻴﺎز اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎر از ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ‬
‫ﺧﻂ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮ روي ﺧﻂ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ)اﻧﺸﻌﺎب(‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ دو ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﺷﺪه و ﻛﺞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎي ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﺎر ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮرت ﺗﺨﻴﻠﻲ در ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻴﮕﺮدﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪54‬‬
‫)‪IPS-M-GN-210(1‬‬
‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ ‪Mar. 2009/ 1388‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
‫ﭼﺮخ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﭼﺮﺧﻨﺪه‬
‫)‪2.10 (c‬‬
‫‪) 10-2‬ج(‬
‫‪Right Angle Live Roller to Live Roller Transfer. Requires separation of loads on incoming conveyor. Unusually‬‬
‫‪long or odd shaped loads generally require figure 2.10a or 2.10b Transfer.‬‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺧﻂ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺮﻗﻲ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل دﻫﻨﺪه ﻋﻤﻮد ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬در اﻳﻦ ﻧﻮع اﻧﺘﻘﺎل دﻫﻨﺪه ﻻزم اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي وارد ﺷﻮﻧﺪه ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬
‫اﺻﻠﻲ از ﻫﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎرﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎدي داراي ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ و ﻧﺎﺟﻮر ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﻪ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل دﻫﻨﺪه ﻫﺎي ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه‬
‫در ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 10-2‬اﻟﻒ ﻳﺎ ‪ 10-2‬ب ﻧﻴﺎز دارﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Fig. 2.10‬‬
‫‪42‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪10-2‬‬
‫‪DIVERTER AND SPUR‬‬
‫‪CHAIN DRIVEN LIVE ROLLER SPUR‬‬
‫اﻧﺸﻌﺎب ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
‫اﻧﺸﻌﺎب و ﻛﺞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬
‫‪Fig. 2.12‬‬
‫‪Fig. 2.11‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪12-2‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪11-2‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ ‪Mar. 2009/ 1388‬‬
‫)‪IPS-M-GN-210(1‬‬
‫‪STOP AND PUSHER‬‬
‫‪DIVERTER PARALLEL LANES‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه و ﻫﻞ دﻫﻨﺪه ﺑﺎر‬
‫ﻛﺞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺧﻄﻮط ﻣﻮازي‬
‫‪Fig. 2.14‬‬
‫‪Fig. 2.13‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪14-2‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪13-2‬‬
‫‪CHAIN CONVEYOR RAISE/LOWER WITH‬‬
‫‪PUSHER‬‬
‫‪CHAIN CONVEYOR RAISE/LOWER‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ زﻧﺠﻴﺮي ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻞ دﻫﻨﺪه ﺑﺎر‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ زﻧﺠﻴﺮي ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮ‬
‫‪Fig. 2.16‬‬
‫‪Fig. 2.15‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪16-2‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪15-2‬‬
‫‪90° AIR POWERED PUSH-OFF‬‬
‫ﻫﻞ دﻫﻨﺪه ﺑﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻫﻮا ﺑﺼﻮرت ‪ 90‬درﺟﻪ اي‬
‫‪Fig. 2.17‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪17-2‬‬
‫‪56‬‬
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
(‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ )زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ دار‬-6
6. ROLLER CHAIN
‫ ﻧﻤﺎد ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬1-6
6.1 Chain Designation
‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﭘﻮﺷﺶ داده ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎد‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه در ﻣﺜﺎل زﻳﺮ و ﺑﺎ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫ رﻗﻢ‬.‫ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬ASME B 29.100 ‫در اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫دﺳﺖ راﺳﺖ در ﺷﻤﺎره زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺮاي زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺳﺒﻚ‬1 ‫وﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺻﻔﺮ اﺳﺖ؛ ﻋﺪد‬
.‫ ﺑﺮاي زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﻲ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ دار ** اﺳﺖ‬5 ‫وزن* ؛ و ﻋﺪد‬
3 ‫اﻋﺪاد ﻃﺮف ﭼﭗ رﻗﻢ دﺳﺖ راﺳﺖ ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪه ﺗﻌﺪاد‬
‫ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺷﻤﺎره زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻧﺸﺎن‬H ‫ ﺣﺮف‬.‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي در ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎم اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺪﻫﻨﺪه ﺳﺮي‬H ‫ ﻋﺪم ذﻛﺮ‬.‫دﻫﻨﺪه ﺳﺮي ﻫﺎي ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺧﻂ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره‬2 ‫ ﻋﺪد‬.‫ﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد اﺳﺖ‬
‫ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬3 ‫ و ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮر‬،‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪه زﻧﺠﻴﺮ دو رﺷﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻳﻚ‬،‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺜﺎل‬.‫ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﭼﻬﺎر رﺷﺘﻪ و ﻏﻴﺮه اﺳﺖ‬4 ،‫ﺳﻪ رﺷﺘﻪ‬
50/80 ‫ و ﮔﺎم‬،‫ ده رﺷﺘﻪ‬،‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮ از ﺳﺮي ﻫﺎي ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ‬
‫( ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎدي ﻛﻪ در ﻣﺜﺎل زﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ داده‬160 ‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي )ﺷﻤﺎره‬
.‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
Chain covered by this specification is identified
by the designation shown in example below and in
more detail in ASME standard B29.100. The right
hand digit in the chain number is zero for roller
chains of the usual proportions; 1 for light weight
chain*; and 5 for a rollerless bushing chain**.
The numbers to the left of the right hand digit
denote the number of 3 mm in the pitch. The letter
H following the chain number denotes the heavy
series. Absence of the letter H denotes the
standard series. The hyphenated number 2
suffixed to the chain number denotes a double
strand, 3 a triple strand, 4 a quadruple strand
chain, etc. For example, a heavy series, ten strand,
50.80 mm pitch (Number 160) chain is designated
as shown in the example below.
1
6
0
H
-10
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
Chain number……………………………………………………………….‫ﺷﻤﺎره زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
Number of strands ...............................................…………………………………..‫ﺷﻤﺎره رﺷﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
Heavy Series (omit on Standard Series) (‫ﺳﺮي ﻫﺎي ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ )از ﺳﺮي ﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺣﺬف ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
Conventional chain with rollers ................................................................................. ‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﺎرف ﺑﺎ ﻏﻠﺘﻚﻫﺎ‬
Number of 3 mm, per pitch ……………………………………. ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ در ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎم‬3 ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد‬
* Chain Number 41, Standard Series, is the
Only Chain Furnished in the Light Weight
Design.
‫ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮي‬،‫ ﺳﺮيﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬،41 ‫* زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺷﻤﺎره‬
** Chain Number 25 and 35, Standard Series,
are the Only Chains Furnished without Rollers
،‫ ﺳﺮي ﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬، 35 ‫ و‬25 ‫** زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻫﺎي ﺷﻤﺎره‬
.‫اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ در ﻃﺮح ﺳﺒﻚ وزن ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
.‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪون ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﺮي ﻫﺎي ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬2-6
6.2 Heavy Series Chains
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ و‬19/05 ‫ﺳﺮيﻫﺎي ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺎم ﻫﺎي‬
‫ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ و از ﻧﻈﺮ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ورق ﻫﺎي ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ ارزش اﻳﻦ ﺳﺮي ﻫﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‬.‫ﺳﺮيﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺗﻔﺎوت ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫در ﭘﺬﻳﺮش ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر در ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻤﺘﺮ‬
.‫اﺳﺖ‬
Heavy series chains are made in 19.05 mm and
larger pitches and differ from the standard series
in thicknesses of link plates. Their value is only in
the acceptance of higher loads during operation at
lower speeds.
57
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ اﺑﻌﺎد‬3-6
6.3 Dimensions
‫ و‬18-2 ‫اﺑﻌﺎد ﻛﻠﻲ ﺑﺮاي زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﺷﻜﻞ ﻫﺎي‬
‫ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ذﻛﺮ ﺷﺪه‬19-2
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬ASTM B 29.100 ‫در اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
The general dimensions for roller chains shown in
Figs. 2.18 and 2.19 shall be as specified in ASME
Standard B 29.100.
‫ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﺗﺎب زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬4-6
6.4 Chain Strength Requirements
‫ ﺗﺎب ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ‬1-4-6
6.4.1 Minimum ultimate tensile strength
‫ ﺳﺮي ﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬-‫)اﻟﻒ( زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺗﻚ رﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﺗﻚ رﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ‬
‫دارﻧﺪ داراي ﺗﺎب ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از‬
ASME ‫ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬Table 1B ‫ارﻗﺎم ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه در‬
.‫ ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮد‬B29.100-2002
‫ ﺗﺎب ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺮاي‬-‫)ب( زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ رﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﭼﻨﺪ رﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ رﻗﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺗﻚ رﺷﺘﻪ‬
.‫ﺿﺮﺑﺪر ﺗﻌﺪاد رﺷﺘﻪ ﻫﺎي آن ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
(a) Single strand chain. Standard series single
strand chains meeting the requirements of this
Standard will have a minimum ultimate tensile
strength equal to or greater than the values
listed in Table 1B of ASME B29.100-2002.
(b) Multiple strand chain. For multiple strand
chain, the minimum ultimate tensile strength
equals that of a single strand multiplied by the
number of strands.
‫ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺳﺒﻚ وزن ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎد‬-‫)ج( زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺳﺒﻚ وزن‬
(c) Lightweight chain. Lightweight chain
designated as No.41 does not conform to the
general chain proportions. The minimum
ultimate tensile strength is 6.67 kN(1500 lb).
‫ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬NO.41
6/67 ‫ ﺗﺎب ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ اﻳﻦ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬.‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ ﭘﻮﻧﺪ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬1500) ‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ‬
‫اس( ﺑﺮاي‬.‫ﺗﻲ‬.‫ﻳﻮ‬.‫)د( ﺗﺎب ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ )ام‬
(d) Minimum ultimate tensile strength
(M.U.T.S) for chain covered by this Standard
is the minimum force at which an unused,
undamaged chain could fail when subjected to
a single tensile loading test.
‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮي ﻛﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﭘﻮﺷﺶ داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ اي اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ اﮔﺮ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ آﺳﻴﺐ ﻧﺪﻳﺪه و‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﺸﺪه اي ﻃﻲ ﻳﻚ آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ آن‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣﺮدود ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬،‫آزﻣﻮن ﮔﺮدد‬
WARNING: The minimum ultimate tensile
strength is NOT a “working load.” TheM.U.T.S.
greatly exceeds the maximum force that may be
applied to the chain.
‫ ﺗﺎب‬.‫ ﺗﺎب ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﻳﻚ "ﺑﺎرﻛﺎري" ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬:‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ از ﻧﻴﺮوي ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ اي ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﺣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﺑﻪ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ وارد ﺷﻮد ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ از‬-‫( روش آزﻣﻮن‬1)
(1) Test procedure. A tensile force is slowly
applied at a rate not to exceed 50.8 mm/min
(2.0 in./min), in a uniaxial direction, to the
ends of the chain sample.
،‫ اﻳﻨﭻ در دﻗﻴﻘﻪ( ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‬20) ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ در دﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬50/8
‫در ﺟﻬﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﻮر واﺣﺪ ﺑﻪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ آراﻣﻲ‬
.‫وارد ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ ﺣﺘﻲ اﮔﺮ‬.‫( آزﻣﻮن ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﻳﻚ آزﻣﻮن ﻣﺨﺮب اﺳﺖ‬2)
(2) The tensile test is a destructive test.
Even though the chain may not visibly fail
when subjected to the minimum tensile force,
it will have been damaged and will unfit for
service.
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
،‫اﺳﺖ و ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮاً ﻣﺮدود ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮ آﺳﻴﺐ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ دﻳﺪ و ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎر ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
.‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ ﺗﺎب ﭘﻮﻳﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ‬2-4-6
6.4.2. Minimum dynamic strength
(a) Application. Only single strand
standard and heavy series chains are subject to
‫ ﻓﻘﻂ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﺗﻚ رﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺮي ﻫﺎي‬-‫)اﻟﻒ( ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد‬
58
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
the minimum dynamic strength requirement.
Multiple strand chains, attachment chains,
connecting links, and offset links are not
subject to the minimum dynamic strength
requirement.
‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد و ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ در ﻣﻌﺮض اﻟﺰام ﺗﺎب ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﭘﻮﻳﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي‬،‫ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﭼﻨﺪ رﺷﺘﻪ‬.‫ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﻗﺮار دارﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻫﺎي اﺗﺼﺎل و ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻫﺎي دو ﺧﻢ دار در‬،‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ دار‬
.‫ﻣﻌﺮض اﻟﺰام ﺗﺎب ﭘﻮﻳﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪارﻧﺪ‬
‫ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ آزﻣﻮن ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ را ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺎري‬-‫)ب( ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ‬
(b) Conformance. The chain shall survive a
conformance test at the load listed for the
subject chain in Table 1B of ASME B 29.1002002.
ASME ‫ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬1B ‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ در ﺟﺪول‬
‫ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﻘﻴﺖ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ‬B 29.100-2002
.‫ﻛﻨﺪ‬
WARNING: The dynamic test values are not
valid characteristics for designing actual
applications. Neither the specified value nor the
test results are to be interpreted as allowable
working loads.
‫ ارﻗﺎم آزﻣﻮن ﭘﻮﻳﺎﻳﻲ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎت ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮي ﺑﺮاي ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ‬:‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ ﻧﻪ رﻗﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه و ﻧﻪ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ‬.‫ﻛﺎرﺑﺮدﻫﺎي واﻗﻌﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
.‫آزﻣﻮن ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻌﻨﻮان ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻣﺠﺎز ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
‫ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ آزﻣﻮن ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ‬-‫)ج( روش آزﻣﻮن‬
(c) Test procedure. The chain shall be tested
according to the conformance test described in
ASME B29.26-2001.
‫ ﺷﺮح داده ﺷﺪه‬ASME B29.26-2001 ‫ﻛﻪ در اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫اﺳﺖ آزﻣﻮن ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺣﺘﻲ اﮔﺮ‬.‫ آزﻣﻮن ﭘﻮﻳﺎﻳﻲ ﻳﻚ آزﻣﻮن ﻣﺨﺮب اﺳﺖ‬:‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
WARNING: The dynamic test is a destructive
test. Even though the chain may survive the test
without failure, it will have been damaged and
will be unfit for service.
‫ ﺑﻬﺮ‬،‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﺪ آزﻣﻮن را ﺑﺪون ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮاﻓﻘﺖ ﺑﮕﺬراﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﺣﺎل آﺳﻴﺐ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ دﻳﺪ و ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎر ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬3-4-6
6.4.3. Chain preloading.
‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮي ﻛﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺣﻴﻦ‬
‫ درﺻﺪ ﺗﺎب‬30 ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺖ دﺳﺖ ﻛﻢ ﺑﺎ اﻋﻤﺎل ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ‬
‫ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬TABLE B ‫ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ داده ﺷﺪه در‬
.‫ از ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ASME B29.100-2002
Chain conforming to this Standard shall be
preloaded during manufacturing by applying a
tensile force equal to a minimum of 30% of the
M.U.T.S. given in Table 1B of ASME B29.1002002.
‫ رواداري ﻃﻮل زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬5-6
6.5 Chain Length Tolerance
‫ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺴﺮي ﻃﻮل‬،‫ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺎر اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬،‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻧﻮ‬
:‫ رواداري ﺑﺮاي زﻳﺎدي ﻃﻮل زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ‬.‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
53/76
1/25 ‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
+
2
(‫ﻣﺘﺮ )ﮔﺎم ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
New chain, under standard measuring load, shall
not be under length. Over length tolerance is
53.76
( Pitch in mm ) 2
 1.25
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
mm
m
:‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ رواداري زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ دار ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ‬
107/52
2/49 ‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
+
2
(‫ﻣﺘﺮ )ﮔﺎم ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
Also tolerance of chain with attachments is
107.52
mm
+ 2.49
.
2
m
(pitch in mm)
‫ در اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬2.3 ‫ و‬1.5 ‫)ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎي‬
.(ASME B29.100-2002
(See also clauses 1.5 and 2.3 in ASME
B29.100:2002).
59
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
Dp = pin diameter
Dr = roller diameter
LPT = link plate thickness
P = chain pitch
W = chain width between
roller link plates
‫ = ﻗﻄﺮ ﺧﺎر‬DP
‫ = ﻗﻄﺮ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ‬Dr
‫ = ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ورق ﺣﻠﻘﻪ‬LPT
‫ = ﮔﺎم زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬P
‫ = ﻋﺮض زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ورﻗﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻚ‬W
Fig. 2.18-CHAIN ASSEMBLY
‫ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬18-2 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
43
Fig. 2.19-SINGLE AND MULTIPLE CHAIN ASSEMBLIES
‫ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻫﺎي زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺗﻚ رﺷﺘﻪ و ﭼﻨﺪ رﺷﺘﻪ‬19-2 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
60
‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ ‪Mar. 2009/ 1388‬‬
‫)‪IPS-M-GN-210(1‬‬
‫‪ -7‬ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ‬
‫‪7. SPROCKETS FOR ROLLER CHAIN‬‬
‫‪ 1-7‬اﻧﻮاع ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫‪7.1 Sprocket Types‬‬
‫ﭼﻬﺎر ﻧﻮع ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﭘﻮﺷﺶ داده‬
‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ در ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 20-2‬ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ و ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎد زﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪Four types of sprockets covered by this‬‬
‫‪specification are shown in Fig. 2.20 and are‬‬
‫‪designated as:‬‬
‫ﻧﻮع اﻟﻒ ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺎ ورق ﺳﺎده‬
‫‪Plain plate,‬‬
‫‪Type A‬‬
‫‪Hub on one side only,‬‬
‫‪Type B‬‬
‫ﻧﻮع ج‬
‫ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎف ﺑﺮ روي دو ﭘﻬﻠﻮ‬
‫‪Hub on both sides,‬‬
‫‪Type C‬‬
‫ﻧﻮع د‬
‫ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎف ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﺪاﺷﺪن‬
‫‪Hub detachable‬‬
‫‪Type D‬‬
‫ﻧﻮع ب‬
‫ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎف ﻓﻘﻂ روي ﻳﻚ ﭘﻬﻠﻮ‬
‫ﻧﻮع ب‬
‫ﻧﻮع اﻟﻒ‬
‫ﻧﻮع ج‬
‫ﻧﻮع د‬
‫‪Fig. 2.20-SPROCKET TYPES‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 20-2‬اﻧﻮاع ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
‫‪ 2-7‬ﻧﻴﻤﺮخ دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ‬
‫‪7.2 Tooth Profile‬‬
‫ﺑﺮش ﻫﺎي اﻟﻒ و ب در ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ، 21-2‬ﭘﺨﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي‬
‫دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ را ﻧﺸﺎن‬
‫ﻣﻴﺪﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮش ج در ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،21-2‬ﺟﺎﺑﮕﺎه ﻟﺒﻪ دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﭼﺮخ‬
‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮ را ﺑﺮاي زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﭼﻨﺪ رﺷﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ﻫﺪاﻳﺖ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺮ روي ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺮاﺳﺘﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ‬
‫از ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺮاﺳﺘﺎﻳﻲ ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻣﺠﺎز‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎم ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي‬
‫ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺦ دار ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺦ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺼﻮرت‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه در ﺑﺮش اﻟﻒ ﻳﺎ ب ﻳﺎ داراي ﻧﻴﻤﺮﺧﻲ در ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫آن دو ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻌﺎع ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﭽﻪ ‪ r f‬ﻣﺴﺎوي اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ‪×0/04‬‬
‫ﮔﺎم ﺑﺮاي ﻗﻄﺮ ﻧﺎف ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ‪ .‬اﺑﻌﺎد دﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه در ﺷﻜـﻞ‬
‫‪ 21-2‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄـــﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت داده ﺷﺪه در ‪ASME‬‬
‫‪ B29.100‬ﺑﺮاي ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي دﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Fig. 2.21, Sections A and B, shows the‬‬
‫‪recommended sprocket tooth chamfer for roller‬‬
‫‪chains. Fig. 2.21, Section C, shows sprocket tooth‬‬
‫‪flange location for multiple strand roller chains.‬‬
‫‪All sprocket flanges shall be chamfered to guide‬‬
‫‪the chain onto the sprocket in case of‬‬
‫‪misalignment due to sprocket misalignment or‬‬
‫‪permissible flange weave. Flange chamfer may be‬‬
‫‪either as in Section A or B or any intermediate‬‬
‫× ‪profile. The fillet radius r f max. equals 0.04‬‬
‫‪pitch for maximum hub diameter. Other‬‬
‫‪dimensions indicated in Fig. 2.21 shall be as‬‬
‫‪specified in ASME B 29.100 for precision‬‬
‫‪sprockets.‬‬
‫‪61‬‬
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
A‫ﺑﺮش‬
C‫ﺑﺮش‬
B‫ﺑﺮش‬
44
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
Fig. 2.21- SPROCKET TOOTH PROFILE
‫ ﻧﻴﻤﺮخ دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬21-2 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬3-7
7.3 Sprocket Application
‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﻣﻴﺸﻮد ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﺑﻜﺎر رﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺮ روي‬
‫ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪهﻫﺎي زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮم ﺗﺮاش دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮي ﻛﻪ داراي ﻗﻄﺮ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﺪه‬.‫ﺗﺮاﺷﻴﺪه ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺰرگ ﺗﺮ از اﺑﻌﺎد اﺳﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﺮاﺑﻲ زود رس‬
‫ رواداري ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬،‫ ﺑﻬﻤﻴﻦ دﻟﻴﻞ‬.‫ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ‬ASME B29.100 ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ در اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎي ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﺬاري ﺷﺪه‬.‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫و رواداريﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ روي آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮔﺮدد ﺗﺎ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎي‬.‫ﻛﻪ ﻗﻄﺮ اﺳﻤﻲ اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﺪه از آﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﭼـــﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ اﻧﺪازهﻫــﺎي داده ﺷﺪه در‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬ASME B29.100
Sprockets used on roller chain drives should be
cut with standard tooth form cutters. A sprocket
having a caliper diameter larger than the nominal
dimension can cause early destruction of a chain
drive. For this reason, ASME B29.100
manufacturing tolerances on this dimension are
negative. Sprocket drawings should be
dimensioned and tolerance indicated which will
insure that the nominal caliper diameter will not
be exceeded. Sprocket diameters shall be as
specified in ASME B 29.100.
‫ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻫﺎي دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬4-7
7.4 Sprocket Tooth Forms
‫ﻃﺮح ﺷﻜﻞ دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ و داده ﻫﺎي ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻧﺸﺴﺖ آﻧﻬﺎ‬
.‫ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬ASME B29.100 ‫در اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
The standard tooth form design and seating curve
data are shown in ASME B 29.100.
‫ اﺑﻌﺎد ﻧﺎف‬5-7
7.5 Hub Dimensions
‫ ﺑﻪ‬.‫ و ﻃﻮل‬،‫ ﻗﻄﺮ داﺧﻠﻲ‬،‫اﺑﻌﺎد ﻣﻬﻢ ﻧﺎف ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻨﺪ از ﻗﻄﺮ ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ‬
‫ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻧﺎف ﺑﺎ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت‬،‫اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﺤﺪودﻳﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﺮ‬
:‫ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
The important hub dimensions are the outside
diameter, bore, and length. Except for the
limitations on diameter, hub design is governed by
maximum torque requirements:
‫( ﻗﻄﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ ﻧﺎف ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﻟﻘﻲ ورق ﻫﺎي ﺣﻠﻘﻪ‬1
1) The maximum hub diameter is limited by
the need to clear the chain link plates. In some
cases, the hubs of small diameter sprockets are
grooved to provide this clearance.
‫ ﻧﺎف ﻫﺎي ﭼﺮخ‬،‫ در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﻣﻮارد‬.‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪود ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
،‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺑﺮاي اﻳﺠﺎد اﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ آزاد‬
.‫ﺷﻴﺎردار ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
62
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
2) The maximum bore is limited by the need
for sufficient hub thickness to provide for a
keyway and set screws.
‫( ﻗﻄﺮ دروﻧﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﺎف‬2
3) Hub length must be sufficient to insure
stability of the sprocket on the shaft.
‫( ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن از ﭘﺎﻳﺪاري ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺮ روي ﻣﻴﻠﻪ‬3
.‫ﺑﺮاي اﻳﺠﺎد ﺷﻴﺎر ﺟﺎﺧﺎر و ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﺪود ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻣﺤﻮر ﻃﻮل ﻧﺎف ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺟﺎﺧﺎرﻫﺎ‬6-7
7.6 Keyways
‫اﮔﺮ ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻧﻴﺮوي ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ و ﻣﻴﻠﻪ از ﺧﺎر‬
‫ ﺧﺎرﻫﺎ و ﺟﺎﺧﺎرﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻴﺎت‬،‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
If keys are used to transmit torque between
sprockets and shaft, they must be proportioned
according to accepted design practice.
‫ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺮاش‬7-7
7.7 Cutter Sources
‫ﺗﺮاش ﻫـﺎ و ﻧﺎف ﻫﺎي ﺳــﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ از ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺮاش اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻮﺟﻮد‬ASME B29.100
.‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
Cutters and hobs made in conformance with
ASME B 29.100 are available from standard
cutter sources.
‫ ﻗﻮاﻋﺪ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬8-7
7.8 General Principles
‫ و‬،‫ ﻧﻴﻤﺮخ‬،‫ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬،‫ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي ﺷﻜﻞ دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ‬
‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد ﺑﺮاي‬.‫ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎي ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮﻛﺎري ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻛﻪ در ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﺎي‬
،‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﺎ زﻳﺎد ﻳﺎ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮان ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬.‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً داراي دﻧﺪاﻧﻪﻫﺎي ﺳﺨﺖ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬120 ‫ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﺑﺰرگ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از‬
Sprockets shall have tooth form, thickness,
profile, and diameters conforming to this
specification. For maximum service life, small
sprockets operating at moderate to high speeds, or
near the rated horsepower, should have normally
hardened teeth. Large sprockets should not exceed
120 teeth.
‫ ﻣﻮاد‬-8
8. MATERIAL
Materials shall be selected complying ASTM
Standard specifications or Equivalent.
‫ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﺎدل آن‬ASTM ‫ﻣﻮاد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
9. RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION AND
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
‫ ﺷﻴﻮهﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﻧﺼﺐ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬-9
‫ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎي ﺳﺨﺖ ﻣﺤﻮر‬1-9
9.1 Rigid Shaft Supports
‫ﻣﺤﻮرﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮر ﺳﺨﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎنﻫﺎي ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﺪه ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﺪن ﻣﺤﻮر ﻳﻚ راﺳﺘﺎﻳﻲ اوﻟﻴﻪ را ﺑﻬﻢ‬.‫ﺗﻜﻴﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ زد و ﻋﻤﺮ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ را ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﺧﻮاﻫﺪﻛﺮد‬
Shafts must be rigidly supported in properly
designed bearings. Shaft displacement will
destroy initial alignment and shorten chain life.
‫ ﻫﻤﺮاﺳﺘﺎﻳﻲ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه‬2-9
9.2 Drive Alignment
‫ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺑﻬﺮهﺑﺮداري ﺑﻪ دﻗﺖ ﻳﻚ‬،‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
: ‫ روش ﻳﻚ راﺳﺘﺎ ﻛﺮدن ﺷﺎﻣﻞ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬.‫راﺳﺘﺎ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
Drives should be carefully aligned before
operation. Alignment procedure includes insuring
that:
‫ در ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺮار‬،‫ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎرت دﻳﮕﺮ‬.‫( ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺮاز ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬1
1) Shafts are level, i.e., lie in the same plane;
.‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
.‫( ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮازي ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬2
2) shafts are parallel;
‫( ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﻚ راﺳﺘﺎ ﺑﻮده و ﺧﺎرج از ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ‬3
3) sprockets are in line and not offset on the
shafts.
.‫ﻗﺮار ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
63
‫)‪IPS-M-GN-210(1‬‬
‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ ‪Mar. 2009/ 1388‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺮاﺳﺘﺎﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻮﻳﮋه در ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪهﻫﺎي ﭼﻨﺪ رﺷﺘﻪ اي‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﻧﺎﻳﻜﺴﺎن در زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺷﺪه و ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫زود رس آن ﺷﻮد‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع ﺑﻮﻳﮋه در ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه ﻫﺎي زﻧﺠﻴﺮي‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ دو واﺣﺪ دﻛﻞ ﺣﻔﺎري )ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺜﺎل‪ ،‬در ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺎ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺪه ﻟﻮﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﺣﻔﺎري و ﭘﻤﭗﻫﺎ )ﺗﻠﻤﺒﻪﻫﺎ( ﻛﺎر‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﻬﻢ اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﻗﺖ ﻛﺮد ﺗﺎ از ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ راﺳﺘﺎي‬
‫ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﺑﺎر ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻧﺎﻫﻢ راﺳﺘﺎﻳﻲ ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‪،‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه ﺑﻬﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﻲﻳﺎري )ﺑﻴﻜﺎري( ﻣﻲﺗﻮاﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﻫﻤﺮاﺳﺘﺎ ﮔﺮدد و ﺑﺎ وﺟﻮد اﻳﻦ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﺑﻌﻠﺖ اﻧﺤﺮاف‬
‫ﺳﺎزهاي داراي ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺮاﺳﺘﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﻳﺐ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Misalignment, particularly in multiple strand‬‬
‫‪drives, results in uneven loading in the chain and‬‬
‫‪can cause early failure. This is especially‬‬
‫‪important on chain drives operating between two‬‬
‫‪units of the rig (i.e., compound to drawworks or‬‬
‫‪compound to pump). Care also must be taken to‬‬
‫‪avoid deflection under load which will result in‬‬
‫‪sprocket misalignment. A drive could be perfectly‬‬
‫‪aligned when standing idle and still have‬‬
‫‪destructive misalignment during operation due to‬‬
‫‪structural deflection.‬‬
‫‪ 3-9‬ﻛﺸﺶ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
‫‪9.3 Chain Tension‬‬
‫ﻛﺸﺶ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ اﺳﺎﺳﻲ اﺳﺖ‪ .‬زﻧﺠﻴﺮي ﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺳﻔﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺸﻴﺪه ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ زﻳﺎدي را اﻋﻤﺎل ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺮد‪ .‬زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺷﻞ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻛﺎر ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮ و ﺻﺪا و‬
‫ﻧﻮﺳﺎن زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﮔﺮدد ﻛﻪ آن ﺧﻮد ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺳﺒﺐ ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎدي زﻧﺠﻴﺮ و ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﺸﺶ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ را ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ رﺷﺘﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻲ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻛﺸﻴﺪه‬
‫ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺷﻜﻢ دادﮔﻲ رﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ را ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ در‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 22-2‬ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮد اﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻢ دادﮔﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻧﻘﻄﻪ وﺳﻂ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﺪه‬
‫اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً دو ﺗﺎ ﺳﻪ درﺻﺪ ﻃﻮل ﺧﻂ ﻣﻤﺎس ﺑﻪ ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه ﺷﻴﺐ دار ﺑﻬﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه اﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻠﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮي داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه ﻋﻤﻮدي‪ ،‬ﺷﺮط ﺳﻔﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺮدن زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺿﺮوري اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Proper chain tension is essential. Too tight a chain‬‬
‫‪will impose excessive bearing loads. Too loose a‬‬
‫‪chain may cause noisy operation and chain‬‬
‫‪pulsations which could result in abnormal chain‬‬
‫‪and sprocket wear. For a check of chain tension,‬‬
‫‪turn one sprocket to tighten the lower strand of‬‬
‫‪chain; then measure the sag of upper strand as‬‬
‫‪shown in Fig.2.22. This sag measure at the‬‬
‫‪midpoint, should be approximately two to three‬‬
‫‪percent of the length of the tangent to the‬‬
‫‪sprockets. An inclined drive should have less‬‬
‫‪slack than a horizontal drive. For a vertical drive,‬‬
‫‪provision for take up of chain is desirable.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺸﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻢ دادﮔﻲ در ﻧﻘﻄﻪ وﺳﻂ‬
‫‪Fig. 2.22- CHAIN SAG MEASUREMENT - HORIZONTAL DRIVE‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 22-2‬اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻜﻢ دادﮔﻲ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‪ -‬ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه اﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫‪64‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ آزادي از ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ‬4-9
9.4 Freedom from Interference
.‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه و اﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﺠﺎور ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺧﻮردي اﺗﻔﺎق ﺑﻴﺎﻓﺘﺪ‬
‫ از‬،‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ آزاد ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻮﺳﺎن داﺷﺘﻦ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬،‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
‫ و ازدﻳﺎد ﻃﻮل زﻧﺠﻴﺮ در‬،‫ﺟﺎ دررﻓﺘﻦ اﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
.‫اﺛﺮ ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺶ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
Contact between the drive and adjacent objects
must not occur. Ample clearances should be
provided to allow for chain pulsations, possible
end float of shafts, and chain elongation due to
wear.
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬5-9
9.5 Center Distance
‫ ﮔﺎم زﻧﺠﻴﺮي ﺑﺴﻴﺎر‬50 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬30 ‫ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬،‫ﺑﻄﻮر ﻛﻠﻲ‬
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬،‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬.‫ﺿﺮوري اﺳﺖ‬
‫ درﺟﻪ اي زﻧﺠﻴﺮ را ﺑﺮ روي‬120‫دﺳﺖ ﻛﻢ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻳﻜﭙﺎرﭼﻪ‬
.‫ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺗﺮ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
In general, a center distance of 30 to 50 chain
pitches is most desirable. The distance between
sprocket centers should provide at least 120 deg
chain wrap on the smaller sprocket.
‫( ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ و‬1
1) Drives may be installed with either
adjustable or fixed center distances. Adjustable
centers simplify the control of chain slack.
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬.‫ﻳﺎ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﺷﻠﻲ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ را آﺳﺎن ﻣﻲ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪ‬
2) For drives on fixed centers, an idler or shoe
may be used to provide slack adjustment.
These devices may also be used to control
backlash, or to assure 120 deg minimum chain
wrap on the smaller sprocket.
‫( ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻪ وﺟﻮد آوردن اﻣﻜﺎن ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻠﻲ در‬2
3) The center distance to accommodate a
whole number of pitches may be calculated
from the following formula:
‫( ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﺑﺮاي ﺟﺎﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻛﺎﻣﻠﻲ از ﮔﺎم ﻫﺎ را‬3
‫ ﻣﻴﺘﻮان از ﻳﻚ ﻫﺮزﮔﺮد‬،‫ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪهﻫﺎي ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ ازاﻳﻦ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮان ﺑﺮاي‬.‫ﻳﺎ ﻛﻔﺸﻚ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‬
‫ درﺟﻪاي‬120 ‫ ﻳﺎ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن از ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‬،‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﭘﺲ زﻧﻲ‬
.‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺮ روي ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺗﺮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‬
:‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮان ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﻮل زﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻛﺮد‬
*
C
L  N2n  ( L 
N n
2
) 2  8 ( Nn2)
2
4
4
: ‫در ﺟﺎﻳﻴﻜﻪ‬
Where:
C
is center distance in pitches.
L
is chain length in pitches.
N
is No. of teeth on the large
sprocket.
n
is No. of teeth on the small
sprocket.
.‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﮔﺎمﻫﺎ اﺳﺖ‬C
.‫ ﻃﻮل زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﮔﺎم ﻫﺎ اﺳﺖ‬L
.‫ ﺗﻌﺪاد دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺰرگ اﺳﺖ‬N
.‫ ﺗﻌﺪاد دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ اﺳﺖ‬n
‫( ﻃﻮل زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه ﻣﻌﻴﻦ را ﻣﻴﺘﻮان ﺑﺎ‬4
4) The length of chain for a given drive
may be calculated with the following
formula:
:‫ﻓﺮﻣﻮل زﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻛﺮد‬
*
L  2C  N  n 
2
65
(N  n) 2
4 2C
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫* ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﻫﺸﺘﻤﻴﻦ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﻛﺘﺎب ﻣﻬﻨﺪس ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻚ ﺷﻴﻨﻠﻲ‬
*Based on shinley’s Mechanical Engineering
Design : Eight Edition (Equations 17-34, 17-35
and 17-36)
(36-17 ‫ و‬35-17 ،34-17 ‫)ﻓﺮﻣﻮل ﻫﺎي‬
:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note:
‫ﻓﺮﻣﻮل ﻫﺎي ﻳﺎد ﺷﺪه ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬،‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ اﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ از ﻳﻚ ﻫﺮزﮔﺮد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﺛﺎﺑﺖ از‬.‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدﻫﺎي ﺳﺎزﻧﺪﮔﺎن زﻧﺠﻴﺮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
Above equations are approximations when center
distance is adjustable or an idler is used. For fixed
center drives use chain makers’ recommendations.
ً‫ در ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ‬،‫( ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬5
5) In designing a chain drive, theoretical center
distances should normally be taken as nominal
with the manufacturer’s tolerance on the minus
side. Center distance tables which give
nominal center distance data are available from
American
roller
chain
manufacturers.
Individual experience may indicate it to be
desirable in certain cases to design to the plus
side of theoretical, but this practice should be
followed with caution. When a plus tolerance
is permitted, there is risk of new chain being
too tight around the sprockets. This can result
in chain damage either in installation or during
the break-in period.
‫ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﻧﻈﺮي ﺑﻌﻨﻮان ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ اﺳﻤﻲ ﺑﺎ رواداري‬
‫ ﺟﺪاول ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬.‫ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه در ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻛﻪ داده ﻫﺎي ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي اﺳﻤﻲ را اراﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ از‬
‫ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ‬.‫ﺳﺎزﻧﺪﮔﺎن زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺮدي ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻮارد ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ‬
‫ وﻟﻲ اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ‬،‫در ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﻈﺮي ﺿﺮوري اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ رواداري ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﺠﺎز‬.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ اﺣﺘﻴﺎط اﻧﺠﺎم ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﺧﻄﺮ آن وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻪ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻧﻮ در اﻃﺮاف ﭼﺮخ‬،‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﺪ در‬،‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﺸﻴﺪه ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻧﺼﺐ ﻳﺎ ﻃﻲ دوره ﺟﺎ اﻓﺘﺎدن ﺑﺎﻋﺚ آﺳﻴﺐ رﺳﺎﻧﺪن‬
.‫ﺑﻪ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ ﻏﻼف ﻫﺎي زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬6-9
9.6 Chain Casings
‫ﻏﻼفﻫﺎي زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺮاي آﺳﺎن ﻛﺮدن روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري و ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ‬
.‫ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﮔﺮد و ﻏﺒﺎر زﻳﺎﻧﺒﺎر ﻫﻮا اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻏﻼفﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً از ورﻗﻪﻫﺎي ﻓﻠﺰي ﺳﺨﺖ ﺷﺪه و ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎه ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪهاﻧﺪ و داراي درﻳﭽﻪﻫﺎي دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﺮاي‬
: ‫ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
Chain casings are used to facilitate lubrication and
to protect drives from damage by harmful
atmospheric dusts. These casings are usually
made of sheet metal, stiffened and supported, with
access doors for inspection and maintenance of
the drive:
1) Chain-guard or case clearance sometimes
restricts the useful wear life of a chain. This
happens as normal wear-induced slack collects
at the slack or unloaded strand. When
clearance is limited, wear-induced slack
eventually becomes large enough for the chain
to strike the case, damaging both case and
chain.
‫( ﮔﺎﻫﻲ اوﻗﺎت ﺣﻔﺎظ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻘﻲ ﻏﻼف ﻋﻤﺮ ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺸﻲ‬1
2) Case clearance for allowable wear may be
determined by using the information shown in
Fig. 2.23. Conversely, a given sag
measurement can be used to estimate the
amount of wear on horizontal drives.
‫( ﻟﻘﻲ ﻏﻼف ﺑﺮاي ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺠﺎز را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از‬2
‫ دﻟﻴﻞ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ اﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ ﺟﻤﻊ‬.‫ﻣﻔﻴﺪ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ را ﻣﺤﺪود ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪن ﺷﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺷﻠﻲ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺶ ﻋﺎدي در‬
،‫ زﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﻟﻘﻲ ﻣﺤﺪود ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬.‫رﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻲﺑﺎر اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺷﻠﻲ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺶ ﺳﺮاﻧﺠﺎم ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ﺧﻮردن زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻼف زﻳﺎد ﺷﺪه و ﺑﺎﻋﺚ آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪن‬
.‫ﻏﻼف و زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
.‫ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آورد‬23-2 ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه در ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ ﺑﺎ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ داﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮان ﺑﺎ‬،‫ﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻳﺎد ﺷﺪه ﻣﻴﺰان ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه اﻓﻘﻲ‬
.‫را ﺑﺮآورد ﻛﺮد‬
66
‫)‪IPS-M-GN-210(1‬‬
‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ ‪Mar. 2009/ 1388‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻤﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ازﻳﺎد ﻃﻮل ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺶ ‪%‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻢ دادﮔﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻲ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺷﻜﻢ دادﮔﻲ در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻤﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪Fig. 2.23-CASE CLEARANCE WEAR LIMIT‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 23-2‬ﺣﺪ ﻟﻘﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺶ ﻏﻼف‬
‫‪67‬‬
‫‪46‬‬
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬7-9
9.7 Chain Protection
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻧﻮ ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎن ﻧﺼﺐ در ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺧﻮد ﻧﮕﻬﺪاﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ وﻟﻲ‬،‫ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ در ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ از ﭘﻴﺶ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬.‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺶ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري در ﻫﻮاي آزاد ﺧﺎرج ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن دوام‬
،‫ ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮ آن‬.‫ ﺑﻮﻳﮋه در آب و ﻫﻮاي ﻣﺮﻃﻮب ﻧﻤﻚ دار‬،‫ﻧﺪارد‬
‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪ آﻟﻮده ﺷﺪن ﺑﺎ ﺷﻦ رﻳﺰه و ﻣﻮاد ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ آﺳﻴﺐ رﺳﺎﻧﺪن ﺑﻪ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬
‫ و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻧﺘﻘﺎل روﻏﻦ‬،‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬،‫ﻣﺴﺪود ﺷﺪن ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﻳﻚ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮي‬،‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬.‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﺗﺼﻮر ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات داراي ﺳﺎﺧﺖ دﻗﻴﻖ‬
.‫ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد را ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داﺷﺖ‬،‫دﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ آن رﻓﺘﺎر ﮔﺮدد‬
A new chain should be left in its box until
installation. Chains are prelubricated at the
factory, but this prelubrication will not stand up
under outdoor weather, particularly in salt water
atmosphere. In addition, chains are apt to become
contaminated with grit and foreign material which
will not only harm the chain, but will tend to clog
strainers, filters, and oil lines. A roller chain
should be thought of as a series of bearings that
will perform best if handled like any other
precision-made equipment.
(‫ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري )روان ﺳﺎزي ﺑﺎ روﻏﻦ‬8-9
9.8 Lubrication
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺎل روان ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ﺑﺮاي‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در ﺑﻬﺮه ﺑﺮداري اﺗﺼﺎﻻت زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ آﻧﭽﻪ در‬
،‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ‬.‫ اﻳﺠﺎد ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬،‫ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎي ﺳﺮﻣﺤﻮر ﺷﻜﻞ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن از روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﺷﺪن اﺗﺼﺎﻻت و ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ‬
،‫ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬.‫ﺗﻤﺎس ﻓﻠﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻠﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﻴﺎل روان ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﻜﺎر رود‬
‫ ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮ روان ﺳﺎزي ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬،‫اﮔﺮ در ﺣﺠﻢ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺳﺮد ﺷﺪن ﻣﺆﺛﺮ و ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﮔﻴﺮي در ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ‬
‫ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﻣﻬﻢ‬،‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ دﻟﻴﻞ‬.‫ﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
It has been shown that a separating wedge of fluid
lubricant is formed in operating chain joints much
like that formed in journal bearings. Therefore,
fluid lubricant must be applied to insure an oil
supply to the joints and minimize metal to metal
contact. Lubrication, if supplied in sufficient
volume, also provides effective cooling and
impact damping at the higher speeds. For this
reason, it is important that the lubrication
recommendations be followed.
‫ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪهﻫﺎي زﻧﺠﻴﺮ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﻛﺜﻴﻔﻲ و‬،‫( ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬1
1) Chain drives should be protected against dirt
and moisture and the oil supply kept free of
contamination. Periodic oil change is desirable.
A good grade of non-detergent petroleum base
oil is recommended. Heavy oils and greases
are generally too stiff to enter and fill the chain
joints. Table 2.1 indicates the proper lubricant
viscosity for various surrounding temperatures.
These figures serve as a guide to provide a
lubricant which will enter the pin-bush
bearings
at
normal
drive
operating
temperature.
‫رﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و از آﻟﻮده ﺷﺪن روﻏﻦ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه‬
‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دورهاي روﻏﻦ ﺿﺮوري‬.‫ﺑﺮاي آﻧﻬﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد از روﻏﻦ ﻧﻔﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﻣﺎده ﭘﺎك‬.‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ روﻏﻦﻫﺎي ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ و‬.‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎ درﺟﻪ ﺧﻮب اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎً ﺑﺮاي وارد ﺷﺪن ﺑﻪ درون اﺗﺼﺎل زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ و‬
‫ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ‬1-2 ‫ ﺟﺪول‬.‫ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺳﻔﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫رواﻧﺴﺎز ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ را ﺑﺮاي دﻣﺎﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﺸﺎن‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ارﻗﺎم ﺑﻌﻨﻮان راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ رواﻧﺴﺎزي ﻛﻪ‬.‫ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﺪ در دﻣﺎي ﻛﺎر ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه وارد ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎي‬
.‫ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬،‫داراي ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫( اﮔﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﻬﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎ و‬2
2) If the same lubricant is used for related
equipment such as bearings and hydraulic
systems,
then
additional
lubricant
specifications should be considered. Examples:
anti-foaming and extreme pressure additives,
minimum viscosities and oil cleanliness.
‫ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎي ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ از رواﻧﺴﺎز ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻧﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫ در ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺷﺮاﻳﻄﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت‬،‫ﻣﻲﮔﺮدد‬
:‫ ﻣﺜﻞ‬.‫اﺿﺎﻓﻲ رواﻧﺴﺎز ﻣﻮرد ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
،‫اﻓﺰودﻧﻴﻬﺎي ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻓﺸﺎر ﺧﻴﻠﻲ زﻳﺎد و ﺿﺪ ﻛﻒ زاﻳﻲ‬
.‫ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ و ﺗﻤﻴﺰي روﻏﻦ‬
68
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
TABLE 2.1 - RECOMMENDED LUBRICANT FOR VARIOUS SURROUNDING TEMPERATURES
‫ رواﻧﺴﺎز ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺮاي دﻣﺎﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬1-2 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
1
SAE GRADE
‫اي‬.‫آ‬.‫درﺟﻪ اس‬
(‫)اﻧﺠﻤﻦ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﺎن ﺧﻮدرو‬
2
* SURROUNDING TEMPERATURE
RANGE
°C
‫داﻣﻨﻪ دﻣﺎي ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ درﺟﻪ ﺳﻠﺴﻴﻮس‬
5W
10 W
20 W
30 W
40 W
50 W
-45.6 to +10.0
-28.9 to +26.7
-12.2 to +43.3
-6.7 to +54.4
-1.1 to +60.0
+4.4 to +65.6
،‫* ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ داﻣﻨﻪ دﻣﺎ اﺟﺎزه ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ رواﻧﺴﺎز را ﻣﻲدﻫﺪ‬
* When the Temperature Range Permits a
Choice of Lubricant, the Heavier Grade
Should be Used.
.‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد از درﺟﻪ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ روﺷﻬﺎي روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬9-9
9.9 Methods of Lubrication
‫ﺑﺮاي ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه ﻫﺎي زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﭼﻬﺎر ﻧﻮع روش اﺳﺎﺳﻲ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬
‫ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ و ﻣﻘﺪار ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ‬.‫در زﻳﺮ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ‬.‫ﺷﺪه در ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮع روش ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﺷﺪه ﻣﺆﺛﺮ اﺳﺖ‬
‫در زﻳﺮ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮع روش آورده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫روﻏﻦﻛﺎري ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ و ﻟﺬا اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻮع ﺑﻬﺘﺮ )ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺜﺎل ﻧﻮع‬
‫ ﻋﻤﺮ‬.‫ﭼﻬﺎرم ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎي ﻧﻮع ﺳﻮم( ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺳﻮدﻣﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪاي در اﺛﺮ روش روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬
‫ ﻃﻮل ﻋﻤﺮ‬،‫ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬.‫ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
:‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
Listed below are four basic types of lubrication
for chain drives. The recommended type is
influenced by chain speed and the amount of
power transmitted. These are minimum
lubrication requirements and the use of a better
type (for example, Type IV instead of Type III)
may be beneficial. Chain life can vary
appreciably, depending upon the way the drive is
lubricated-the better the lubrication, the longer the
chain life:
‫ روش روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري دﺳﺘﻲ‬: I ‫ﻧﻮع‬
Type I: Manual Lubrication
‫ روﻏﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻮ ﻳﺎ روﻏﻦ دان‬،‫در اﻳﻦ ﻧﻮع روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬8 ‫ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎً ﻳﻜﺒﺎر در ﻫﺮ‬،‫ﻓﻮاره اي‬
‫ ﺣﺠﻢ و ﺑﺴﺎﻣﺪ )دﻓﻌﺎت( روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺮاي‬.‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ رﻧﮓ رواﻧﺴﺎز در اﺗﺼﺎﻻت زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Oil is applied periodically with a brush or
spout can, preferably once every 8 hrs. of
operation. Volume and frequency should be
sufficient to prevent discoloration of lubricant
in the chain joints.
‫روش روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﭼﻜﻪ اي‬: II‫ﻧﻮع‬
Type II: Drip Lubrication
‫ ﻗﻄﺮه ﻫﺎي روﻏﻦ از ﻳﻚ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬،‫در اﻳﻦ ﻧﻮع روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬
‫روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﭼﻜﻪ اي ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ورق ﺣﻠﻘﻪ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻫﺪاﻳﺖ‬
‫ ﺣﺠﻢ و ﺑﺴﺎﻣﺪ)دﻓﻌﺎت( روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬،‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬.‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ رﻧﮓ رواﻧﺴﺎز در اﺗﺼﺎﻻت زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
‫ اﺣﺘﻴﺎط ﻻزم ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﻫﺪاﻳﺖ ﻧﺎدرﺳﺖ‬.‫ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻗﻄﺮهﻫﺎي روﻏﻦ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ ﻫﻮا ﺑﻌﻤﻞ آورده ﺷﻮد‬
Oil drops are directed between the link plate
edges from a drip lubricator. Volume and
frequency should be sufficient to prevent
discoloration of lubricant in the chain joints.
Precaution must be taken against misdirection
of the drops by windage.
69
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫روش روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﺣﻤﺎﻣﻲ و ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اي‬: III‫ﻧﻮع‬
Type III: Bath or Disc Lubrication
‫در روش روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﺣﻤﺎﻣﻲ رﺷﺘﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻲ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ از درون‬
‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬.‫ﺣﻮﺿﭽﻪ روﻏﻦ در ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه ﻋﺒﻮر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ در ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ‬،‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﺎ روش روﻏﻦﻛﺎري‬.‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺧﻂ ﮔﺎم زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‬
‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ در ﺑﺎﻻي ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‬،‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪاي‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ در روﻏﻦ ﻓﺮو‬12/7 ‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺣﺪود‬
ًٌ‫ روﻏﻦ را از درون ﺣﻮﺿﭽﻪ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ دارد و آﻧﺮا ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ‬.‫ﻣﻲرود‬
‫ ﻗﻄﺮ‬،‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬،‫از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﺎوهاي ﺑﺮ روي زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻬﺪ‬
185 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﮕﻮﻧﻪاي ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖﻫﺎي ﻟﺒﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ‬
.‫ ﻣﺘﺮ در دﻗﻴﻘﻪ را اﻳﺠﺎد ﻛﻨﺪ‬1440 ‫ﻣﺘﺮ در دﻗﻴﻘﻪ و ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫اداﻣﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن در ﺳﺮﻋﺖﻫﺎي ﺧﻴﻠﻲ زﻳﺎد و ﺑﺎ روﻏﻦ زﻳﺎد‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﮔﺮم ﺷﺪن زﻳﺎد از ﺣﺪ و ﻛﻒ زاﻳﻲ روﻏﻦ‬
.‫ﮔﺮدد‬
With bath lubrication the lower strand of chain
runs through a sump of oil in the drive
housing. The oil level should reach the pitch
line of the chain at its lowest point, while
operating. With disc lubrication, the chain
operates above the oil level. The disc, dipping
about 12.7 mm into the oil, picks up oil from
the sump and deposits it onto the chain, usually
by means of a trough. The diameter of the disc
should be such as to produce rim speeds
between 185 m/min. minimum and 1440
m/min. maximum. Continued operation at
extreme speeds and with too much oil can
cause overheating and foaming of the oil.
‫ روش روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن روﻏﻦ‬: IV ‫ﻧﻮع‬
Type IV: Oil Stream Lubrication
‫ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً رواﻧﺴﺎز ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻤﭗ‬،‫در اﻳﻦ روش روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮرت ﻳﻚ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن داﺋﻤﻲ از روﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از‬
‫ روﻏﻦ‬،‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬.‫ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪهﻫﺎي زﻧﺠﻴﺮ رﺳﺎﻧﺪه ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮرت ﻣﺴﺎوي در ﺳﺮﺗﺎﺳﺮ ﻋﺮض زﻧﺠﻴﺮ و در ﺟﻬﺖ رﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺮد‬.‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ آن ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺷﻮد‬
‫ دﺳﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ‬0/06 ‫ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻜﻌﺐ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري در ازاء ﻫﺮ رﺷﺘﻪ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻧﻴﺎز‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
The lubricant is usually supplied by a
circulating pump capable of supplying each
chain drive with a continuous stream of oil.
The oil should be applied inside the chain loop
evenly across the chain width, and directed at
the lower strand. Up to 0.06 dm³/s per chain
strand may be required to give proper drive
cooling.
‫ روش ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي‬10-9
9.10 Recommended Method
‫ ﻧﻮع روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺎي‬2-2 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻨﻈﺮ‬.‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ از ﮔﺎم و ﺳﺮﻋﺖ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺮﺳﺪ ﻧﻮع دﻳﮕﺮي از روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﻏﻴﺮ از روش ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﻣﻮرد‬
‫ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪﮔﺎن ﻓﺮآورده ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪﮔﺎن زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﻮرت‬،‫ﻧﻴﺎز اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻨﺪ از دﻣﺎﻫﺎي زﻧﺠﻴﺮ و‬.‫ﺷﻮد‬
،‫ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﻛﺎر‬.‫ﻏﻼف ﺑﻬﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه‬
.‫ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎص ﺑﻪ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﺗﺪاوم اﺳﺘﻔﺎده و ﻏﻴﺮه‬
‫ درﺟﻪ‬93/3 ‫ از دﻣﺎﻫﺎي زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ از‬،‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
‫ اﻓﺰودن ﺑﻪ ﺣﺠﻢ روﻏﻦ و ﻣﻴﺰان ﺟﺮﻳﺎن‬.‫ﺳﻠﺴﻴﻮس اﺣﺘﺮاز ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ در دﻗﻴﻘﻪ در ازاء ﻫﺮ رﺷﺘﻪ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ( و‬3/78 ‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ آن )ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺮد ﻛﺮدن ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ روﻏﻦ از ﺟﻤﻠﻪ راﻫﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي‬
‫اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﺳﻮدﻣﻨﺪي روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري و ﺳﺮد ﻛﺮدن ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه وﻳﮋه اي ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ‬.‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن ﻣﻴﺰانﻫﺎي دور در‬،‫ﺑﺮاي اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﻋﻤﺮ ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎر ﻛﻢ‬
.‫دﻗﻴﻘﻪ در اﻧﻮاع ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Table 2.2 shows the type of lubrication
recommended for various combinations of pitch
and speed. Consult product manufacturers or
chain manufacturers, when it appears desirable to
use a type of lubrication other than that
recommended. Basic factors to control are chain
and case temperatures during drive operation.
Depending upon severity of service, continuity of
use, etc., special attention to lubrication may be
needed. Chain temperatures above 93.3°C should
be avoided. Increase in oil volume, greater flow
rate (up to one gallon per minute per chain strand)
and external cooling of the oil are ways of
improving effectiveness of drive lubrication and
cooling. Experience with a specific drive may
show that for low load or short life requirements,
extension upwards may be made of the rpm
ratings for the various lubrication types.
70
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
47
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
TABLE 2.2 - RECOMMENDED LUBRICATION TYPE FOR VARIOUS
COMBINATIONS OF PITCH AND SPEED
‫ ﻧﻮع روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﮔﺎم و ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬2-2 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
1
CHAIN
PITCH,
mm
2
52
5
‫ﻧﻮع روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬
54
‫ﮔﺎم زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
I
II
53
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
III
CHAIN SPEED, m/min
IV
‫ ﻣﺘﺮ در دﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬/‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
max.
6.35
9.53
12.70
15.88
19.05
25.40
31.75
38.10
44.45
50.80
57.15
63.50
76.20
3
4
LUBRICATION TYPE
‫ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ‬
max.
150
115
90
75
65
50
45
40
35
30
29
26
23
‫ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ‬
760
520
395
305
260
200
160
130
115
100
90
80
65
max.
‫ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ‬
1065
855
70
610
550
455
395
365
335
305
290
275
245
OVER
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
1065
855
700
610
550
455
395
365
335
305
290
275
245
‫ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻫﺎي وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬11-9
9.11 Connecting Links
،‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه درون زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺳﻮار ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ورق ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮ روي ﺧﺎرﻫﺎي‬
.‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻓﺮو راﻧﺪه ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎ اﻧﺪاﺧﺘﻦ ﺑﺴﺖ ﻫﺎ را اﻣﻜﺎﻧﭙﺬﻳﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻬﻢ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺧﺎرﻫﺎي‬،‫ﭘﺲ از ﺟﺎ اﻧﺪاﺧﺘﻦ ﺑﺴﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ راﻧﺪه ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺴﺖ ﻫﺎ در ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ ﺳﻪ‬،‫ ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ‬.‫ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ ورﻗﻪ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻻ آﻳﻨﺪ‬
:‫ﻛﺎر ﻣﻬﻢ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮد‬
When a connecting link is being assembled into
the chain, it is necessary that the outside link plate
be driven down far enough on the chain pins to
permit insertion of the fasteners. After the
fasteners have been inserted, it is important that
the ends of the chain pins be tapped back so that
the fasteners come up snugly against the outside
of the connecting link plate. By doing this, three
important things are accomplished:
1) The designed clearances between link plates
across the chain width are maintained. A
connecting link plate is driven down too far on
the pins "squeezes" the chain joint so that no
oil can get between the link plates.
‫( ﻟﻘﻲ ﻫﺎي ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻴﻦ ورق ﻫﺎي ﺣﻠﻘﻪ در ﺳﺮاﺳﺮ‬1
2) This "squeezing" prevents joints from
flexing freely as they go around the sprocket.
Proper assembly of the connector will assure
smooth chain action with a minimum whipping
of the chain.
‫( اﻳﻦ "ﺑﻬﻢ ﻓﺸﺮدﮔﻲ" از ﺧﻢ ﺷﺪن راﺣﺖ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬2
‫ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮو راﻧﺪن ﺧﻴﻠﻲ زﻳﺎد ورق‬.‫ﻋﺮض زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﻪ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺮ روي ﺧﺎرﻫﺎ اﺗﺼﺎل زﻧﺠﻴﺮ را ﻃﻮري "ﺑﻬﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻓﺸﺎرد" ﻛﻪ روﻏﻦ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ورﻗﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺣﻠﻘﻪ وارد‬
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺳﻮار‬.‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻋﺒﻮر از روي ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد ﻧﺮم زﻧﺠﻴﺮ را ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬،‫ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
.‫ﻧﻮﺳﺎﻧﻲ داﻳﺮه وار ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﻣﻲ ﺑﺨﺸﺪ‬
‫( ﺑﺎ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﺤﻜﻢ در ﺟﻠﻮ ورق ﺣﻠﻘﻪ‬3
3) With the fasteners snugly against the
connecting link plate, there will be less
tendency for them to work loose and fall out.
‫ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺷﻞ ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن و درآﻣﺪن زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ‬،‫وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
.‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
71
‫)‪IPS-M-GN-210(1‬‬
‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ ‪Mar. 2009/ 1388‬‬
‫‪ 12-9‬ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻫﺎي دو ﺧﻢ دار‬
‫‪9.12 Offset Links‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد در ﺻﻮرت اﻣﻜﺎن از ﺑﻜﺎر ﺑﺮدن ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻫﺎي دو‬
‫ﺧﻢدار اﺣﺘﺮاز ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺮﺣﺎل‪ ،‬اﮔﺮ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ دو ﺧﻢ دار ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﻮر داﺋﻤﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺎرﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﺎ اﻧﺪاﺧﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر‬
‫ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﺧﺎر ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﺎ اﻧﺪاﺧﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮح ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ در ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻫﺎي دو ﺧﻢ دار ﺑﺎ دو‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﮔﺎم ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪The use of offset links should be avoided‬‬
‫;‪wherever possible, for best performance‬‬
‫‪however, if an offset link is necessary, it should‬‬
‫‪be assembled permanently into the chain with‬‬
‫‪press-fit pins. The press fit pin specification is‬‬
‫‪available only in offset assemblies of two or more‬‬
‫‪pitches, depending on the manufacturer’s design.‬‬
‫‪ 13-9‬ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ دوره اي‬
‫‪9.13 Periodic Inspection‬‬
‫ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ دوره اي ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺸﻒ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻫﺎي اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺳﻮدﻫﺎي ﺑﺰرﮔﻲ‬
‫را از ﻧﻈﺮ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺷﺪن ﻋﻤﺮ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ و رﻫﺎﻳﻲ از ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻲ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه دارد‪.‬‬
‫‪Periodic inspection to discover incipient faults‬‬
‫‪pays big dividends in extended chain life and‬‬
‫‪freedom from shutdowns.‬‬
‫‪ (1‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﺒﻨﺪي ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ‬
‫‪1) Inspection Schedule‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮر ﻛﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻫﺎي ﻗﻄﻌﺎت دﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن اﻧﺠﺎم ﮔﻴﺮد‪ .‬ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات در ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﺒﻨﺪي ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ را ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺮد‪ .‬اﻟﺰام اﺻﻠﻲ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﺒﻨﺪي ﻛﺎرﺑﺮدي‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬و ﺑﻄﻮر ﺻﺎدﻗﺎﻧﻪ دﻧﺒﺎل ﮔﺮدد‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻧﻮ ﻣﻌﻤﻮل ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ در ﺧﻼل‬
‫دوره راه اﻧﺪازي اوﻟﻴﻪ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺠﺪد‬
‫وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬در ﺟﺪول‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺗﻲ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻜﺮاري اﻧﺠﺎم ﮔﻴﺮد‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه راه اﻧﺪازي ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬زﻣﺎن ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ داده ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬وﻟﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬اﻳﻦ‬
‫ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ آﻧﭽﻪ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ دﻳﻜﺘﻪ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺪرﻳﺞ اﻧﺠﺎم ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪In general, inspections can coincide with those‬‬
‫‪for other precision parts of the associated‬‬
‫‪equipment. Experience will indicate any need‬‬
‫‪for changes in the inspection schedule. The‬‬
‫‪major requirement is to establish a practical‬‬
‫‪schedule, and to follow it faithfully. As with all‬‬
‫‪new equipment, some readjustments may be‬‬
‫‪required during the initial "run-in" period.‬‬
‫‪Therefore, the initial schedule should provide‬‬
‫‪for frequent inspections. After the drive has‬‬
‫‪been run-in, the time between inspections may‬‬
‫‪be extended, but such changes should be made‬‬
‫‪gradually as experience dictates.‬‬
‫‪ (2‬اﻗﻼم ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ‬
‫‪2) Inspection Items‬‬
‫اﻟﻒ( ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺶ ورﻗﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺣﻠﻘﻪ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ و ﭘﻬﻠﻮﻫﺎي‬
‫‪a) Wear on Link Plates and Sides of‬‬
‫‪Sprocket Teeth‬‬
‫ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ روي ﭘﻬﻠﻮﻫﺎي دﻧﺪاﻧﻪﻫﺎي‬
‫ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ و ﺑﺮ روي ورﻗﻪﻫﺎي ﺣﻠﻘﻪ زﻧﺠﻴﺮاﻧﺠﺎم ﮔﻴﺮد‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺸﻲ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺮاﺳﺘﺎﻳﻲ آﻧﻬﺎ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داد‪.‬‬
‫‪Check for wear on sides of the sprocket teeth‬‬
‫‪and on the link plates. Such wear indicates‬‬
‫‪misalignment.‬‬
‫دﻧﺪاﻧﻪﻫﺎي ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
‫ب( ﻫﻤﺮاﺳﺘﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ و ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
‫‪b) Shaft and Sprocket Alignment‬‬
‫ﻫﻢ راﺳﺘﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ و ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ را اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬اﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎر اﺟﺎزه ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺶ روي زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫و ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ آﺳﻴﺐ رﺳﺎن ﮔﺮدد ﻧﺎﻫﻢ راﺳﺘﺎﺋﻲ اﺻﻼح‬
‫ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪Measure shaft and sprocket alignment, this‬‬
‫‪will permit correction of misalignment before‬‬
‫‪wear on chains and sprockets becomes‬‬
‫‪damaging.‬‬
‫‪72‬‬
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ج( ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
c) Sprockets
‫ﺳﻄﻮح ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺶ‬
،‫ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮرﻛﻪ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه راه اﻧﺪازي ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬.‫ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺳﻄﻮح ﺑﻬﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮي ﭘﺮداﺧﺖ ﺷﺪه و روﺷﻦ‬
‫ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎن در ﺷﻜﻞ دﻧﺪاﻧﻪﻫﺎ‬.‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ از روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬،‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﺋﻲ از ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ اﻳﺠﺎد ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺷﻨﺪ‬
Check for wear on the working faces of the
sprocket teeth. As the drive runs-in, these
faces should develop a bright, polished
appearance. Visible changes in tooth form are
signs of trouble, probably caused by improper
lubrication.
‫د( ازدﻳﺎد ﻃﻮل زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
d) Chain Elongation
‫ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻓﺮﺳﻮده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ از دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي ﭼﺮخ‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ازدﻳﺎد ﻃﻮل ﺑﻴﺶ از‬.‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺳﻮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ از دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﭘﺮد و‬،‫اﻧﺪازه ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ آﺳﻴﺐ رﺳﺎﻧﺪن ﺑﻪ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ و ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﺗﺪرﻳﺠﻲ در ﻃﻮل زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺶ ﻋﺎدي‬
‫ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﻲ در ﺷﻠﻲ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪه ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ‬.‫اﺳﺖ‬
:‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ زﻳﺮ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻏﻔﻠﺖ از روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎرﺳﺎﻳﻲ آن‬‫ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮك ﻫﺎي زﻳﺎد از ﺣﺪ‬‫ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﺪن ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎ‬‫ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﺪن ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﺺ در ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬-
As chain wears it rides higher on the sprocket
teeth. When elongation becomes excessive,
the chain jumps the sprocket teeth, causing
damage to both chain and sprockets. Gradual
increase in chain length is the result of normal
wear. A sudden increase in slack indicates
one or more of the following:
- lubrication failure;
- excessive overloading or shocks;
- displacement of bearings;
- displacement or failure of take-ups.
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪاي از ﻣﻴﺰان ازدﻳﺎد ﻃﻮل زﻧﺠﻴﺮ را ﻣﻴﺘﻮان ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪار ﺷﻜﻢ دادﮔﻲ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺪار اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ‬
.‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻧﺼﺐ آن ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آورد‬
An indication of the magnitude of chain
elongation may be obtained by comparing the
amount of sag with that measured at
installation.
‫ﻫ( ﺗﻤﻴﺰي‬
e) Cleanliness
‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮ و دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ را ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺒﺎﺷﺘﮕﻲ ﻫﺎي ﭼﺮك‬
.‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮاد ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ از ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫اﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ اﻧﺒﺎﺷﺘﮕﻲ ﻋﻤﺮ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه زﻧﺠﻴﺮ را ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
Check the chain and the sprocket teeth for
accumulations of dirt or foreign materials and
for evidence of corrosion. Such accumulation
will reduce chain drive life.
‫و( روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬
f) Lubrication
‫ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ آﻳﺎ‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﻫﻤﻪ اﻧﻮاع روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬
‫ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد‬1-2 ‫درﺟﻪ رواﻧﺴﺎز ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ در ﺟﺪول‬
،‫ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ رواﻧﺴﺎز را ﺑﺮاي ﻋﺎري ﺑﻮدن از ﭼﺮك‬،‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
.‫آب و دﻳﮕﺮ آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ ﻫﺎ آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬،‫ﺑﺮاي روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري دﺳﺘﻲ‬
‫ و اﻳﻨﻜﻪ روﻏﻦ ﺑﻄﻮر‬،‫ﺟﺪول روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﺗﻌﻘﻴﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻜﺎر ﺑﺮده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
For all types of lubrication, check to see if the
grade of lubricant is as recommended in
Table 2.1, also examine lubricant for freedom
from dirt, water, and other contamination.
For manual lubrication, make sure that the
lubrication schedule is being followed, and
that the oil is being properly applied.
73
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ ﭘﺮ ﺑﻮدن روﻏﻦ دان و ﻣﻴﺰان‬،‫ﺑﺮاي روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﭼﻜﻪاي‬
‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬.‫ﭼﻜﻪ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ از آن را ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻟﻮﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ روﻏﻦ ﻣﺴﺪود ﻧﺸﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﻄﺢ‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎي روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﺣﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اي‬
‫روﻏﻦ را ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ رﺳﻮﺑﻲ وﺟﻮد‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري را ﺑﺼﻮرت دورهاي‬.‫ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮ و ﻣﺠﺪداً ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ را در‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎي روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري راﻧﺸﻲ‬
‫ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه ﭘﻤﭗ و ﻓﺸﺎر ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ‬،‫ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻓﺸﺎﻧﻚ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ‬،‫روﻏﻦ را ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺨﺰن روﻏﻦ را‬.‫ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻮﻟﻪﻛﺸﻲ ﻣﺴﺪود ﻧﺸﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮ و ﻣﺠﺪداً ﭘﺮﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﺑﺼﻮرت دورهاي ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫اﮔﺮ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﻧﺸﺪه‬
(‫ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت آﻧﻬﺎ داراي رﻧﮓ ﻗﻬﻮهاي )زﻧﮓ زده‬،‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮد و در ﺻﻮرت ﺧﺎرج ﻛﺮدن ﺧﺎرﻫﺎي ﺣﻠﻘﻪ‬
(‫ آﻧﻬﺎ )ﺑﻪ رﻧﮓ ﻗﻬﻮهاي روﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻴﺮه‬،‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
‫ ﻳﺎ‬،‫ ﺷﻴﺎردار‬،‫ ﺧﺎرﻫﺎ زﺑﺮ‬،‫ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬.‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮرﻧﮓ دادهاﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﻟﻜﻪدار ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﺷﺪه ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ در ﻣﺤﻞ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫رﻧﮓ ﻗﻬﻮهاي ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ رﻧﮓ ﻧﺪادهاﻧﺪ و ﺧﺎرﻫﺎي ﺣﻠﻘﻪ وﺻﻞ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎن داراي ﭘﺮداﺧﺖ ﺑﺮاق ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
For drip lubrication, inspect the filling of the
oiler cups and the rate of feed; check that the
feed pipes are not clogged.
For bath or disc systems, inspect the oil level
and check that there is no sludge. Drain,
flush, and refill the system periodically.
For force feed systems, inspect the oil level in
the reservoir, check the pump drive and the
delivery pressure; check that there is no
clogging of the piping filters or nozzles.
Drain, flush, and refill the reservoir
periodically.
If roller chains have not been lubricated
properly, the joints will have a brownish
(rusty) color and the pins of the connecting
link of the chain, when removed, will be
discolored (light or dark brown). Also, the
pins will be roughened, grooved, or galled.
Properly lubricated chains will not show the
brownish color at the joints and the
connecting link pins will be brightly polished.
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬14-9
9.14 Chain Repair and Replacement
‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬،‫اﮔﺮ ﺳﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻬﺎر ﻗﻄﻌﻪ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻮب ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ اﻳﺠﺎد ﺷﺪه‬،‫ در زﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻋﻴﺐ‬.‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮد آن ﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﻣﺸﺨﺺ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺴﻴﺎر زﻳﺎد دﻳﮕﺮي در‬،‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻲ دﻛﻞ ﺣﻔﺎري ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮي را ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ‬،‫راه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺘﺎً زﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ‬.‫ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻳﻚ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ دﻳﮕﺮ در ﺑﺮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داﺷﺖ‬
‫وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات زﻳﺎدي ﻻزم اﺳﺖ اﻧﺠﺎم ﮔﻴﺮد ﺗﺎ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬،‫ وﻟﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬،‫ﺑﻜﺎر ﺧﻮد اداﻣﻪ دﻫﺪ‬
.‫در اوﻟﻴﻦ زﻣﺎن ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺮح رﻳﺰي ﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﺻﻮرت ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﻧﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ‬،‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬
:‫از آن زﻳﺮا‬
If a chain has had three or more parts which have
failed, it should be replaced. By the time three
failures have occurred, it is quite certain that
many more failures are on the way, and the down
time on the rig will represent more of an expense
than the price of another chain. Naturally there
will be times when excessive repairs will have to
be made to keep operating, but plans should be
made to replace the chain at the earliest practical
time.
The entire chain should be replaced, not just a part
of it because:
‫( در آن ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺣﺘﻲ اﮔﺮ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ در ﻃﻮل ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻮب‬1
1) At that point the entire chain probably has
numerous incipient failures even though it has
not failed over its entire length;
‫ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً داراي ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺐ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
(‫( ﻳﻚ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻧﻮ )ﻳﺎ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﺪه‬2
2) a new piece of chain (or even a used piece)
when spliced into another chain will cause
whipping and load pulsation.
‫ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺷﻼق زﻧﻲ‬،‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ دﻳﮕﺮي وﺻﻠﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫و ﻧﻮﺳﺎن ﺑﺎر ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
74
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﺪ در زﻧﺠﻴﺮ و ﺣﺘﻲ در ﺑﺨﺶ ﻧﻮ آن ﺧﺮاﺑﻲ‬
‫ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺶ را در زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ و‬.‫ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﻲ را اﻳﺠﺎد ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻧﺼﺐ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻧﻮ ﺑﺮ روي ﭼﺮخ‬.‫ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺷﺘﺎب دﻫﺪ‬
‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﻓﺮﺳﻮده ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ آﺳﻴﺐ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ و‬
.‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻤﺮ آن ﺷﻮد‬
This can produce very rapid failure in the chain,
even in the brand-new section. It will also
accelerate wear in both chains and sprockets. The
installation of a new chain on worn sprockets can
cause rapid damage to the chain and a drastic
reduction in chain life.
‫ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬-10
10. SAFETY
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻛﺎرﻛﻨﺎن ﺑﻬﺮهﺑﺮدار ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ در ارﺗﺒﺎط‬ASME/ANSI B20.1 ‫آﺧﺮﻳﻦ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
:‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮارد زﻳﺮ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
Chain and belt driven live roller conveyors shall
be designed with safety provisions for the
protection of operating personnel in accordance
with ASME/ANSI B20.1 latest edition concerning
the following:
a) Nip points occur between chain and
sprockets on chain driven live roller
conveyors.
‫اﻟﻒ( ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ و ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﺮ روي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي‬
b) Nip points occur on transfers and deflectors
used with live roller conveyors.
‫ب( ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ روي اﻧﺘﻘﺎل دﻫﻨﺪهﻫﺎ و ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﻨﻨﺪهﻫﺎي‬
c) Shear points occur at automatic take-ups;
they shall be guarded.
‫ج( ﻧﻘﺎط ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪهﻫﺎي ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﺑﻮﺟﻮد‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر )ﻟﻬﻴﺪﮔﻲ( ﻗﺮار‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر‬
.‫)ﻟﻬﻴﺪﮔﻲ( ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﻲ آﻳﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
(‫ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻛﺮدن)ﺣﻔﺎظ ﮔﺬاري‬1-10
10.1 Guarding
‫ ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‬،‫ﺣﻔﺎظ روي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ورود اﺷﻴﺎء از ﭘﻬﻠﻮ‬،‫ﺑﺎﻻي ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ زﻳﺮﻳﻦ آﻧﻬﺎ را‬،‫ﻳﺎ زﻳﺮ ﺑﻄﺮف ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ اداﻣﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﮕﺮ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺧﻮد‬،‫ﺑﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
On chain driven live rollers, in addition to
covering the top of the sprockets, the guard shall
extend downward to obstruct entrance from the
side and from below, or the underside shall be
covered, unless guarded by location or position.
‫ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬2-10
10.2 Safety Devices
،‫ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲﻫﺎي وﺳﺎﻳﻞ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬،‫ﻫﻤﻪ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﺑﻪ روش "ﺧﺮاب ﺷﺪن اﻳﻤﻦ" آراﻳﺶ‬
‫ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ اﮔﺮ ﺑﺮق ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮد ﻳﺎ ﺧﺮاﺑﻲ در ﺧﻮد‬،‫ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
.‫ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻛﻲ ﭘﻴﺶ آﻳﺪ‬،‫وﺳﻴﻠﻪ اﻳﺠﺎد ﺷﻮد‬
All safety devices, including wiring of electrical
safety devices, shall be arranged to operate in a
"fail safe" manner; that is, if power failure or
failure of the device itself would occur, a
hazardous condition must not result.
‫ از ﻛﺎر اﻧﺪاﺧﺘﻦ و ﺑﻜﺎر اﻧﺪازي دوﺑﺎره اﺿﻄﺮاري‬3-10
10.3 Emergency Stops and Restarts
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﺎي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻧﻪاي آراﻳﺶ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ در ﺻﻮرت ازﻛﺎر‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي آﻏﺎز ﺑﻬﺮهﺑﺮداري دوﺑﺎره از ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ و‬،‫اﻓﺘﺎدن اﺿﻄﺮاري‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات واﺑﺴﺘﻪ آن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ دﺳﺘﻲ دوﺑﺎره ﻳﺎ ﺑﻜﺎراﻧﺪازي‬
.‫در ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ از ﻛﺎراﻧﺪازي اﺿﻄﺮاري ﺷﺮوع ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Conveyor controls shall be so arranged that, in
case of emergency stop, manual reset or start at
the location where the emergency stop was
initiated shall be required for the conveyor(s) and
associated equipment to resume operation.
‫ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت دﻳﮕﺮ‬4-10
10.4 Other Requirements
.‫ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ درﻳﭽﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎزدﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ آﺳﺎن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬1-4-10
10.4.1 Access to inspection holes shall be easy.
‫ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻧﻘﺎط روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﻜﺮر ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬2-4-10
10.4.2 All the frequently used lubrication points
75
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
shall be accessible without it being necessary to
remove the guards.
‫ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺪون اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎزﻛﺮدن ﺣﻔﺎظ از روي‬
.‫ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬،‫آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
10.4.3 It is recommended that equipment be so
designed that cleaning is facilitated.
‫ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﻣﻴﺸﻮد ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﮕﻮﻧﻪاي ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ‬3-4-10
.‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن آﻧﻬﺎ آﺳﺎن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ از اﻳﺠﺎد ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎ و ﮔﻮﺷﻪﻫﺎي ﺗﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﺣﺘﺮاز ﺷﻮد‬4-4-10
10.4.4 Sharp edges and corners are to be avoided.
10.4.5 The projecting parts of moving equipment
must be as small as possible.
‫ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺘﺤﺮك ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن‬5-4-10
10.4.6 The loading and unloading openings of the
enclosed units (in casing or in housing) must be
made in such a way that they prevent access to the
moving components; otherwise suitable protection
shall be provided.
‫ دﻫﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎي ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري و ﺑﺎرﺑﺮداري در واﺣﺪﻫﺎي‬6-4-10
.‫ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺳﺮﺑﺴﺘﻪ )در ﻏﻼف ﻳﺎ در ﺑﺪﻧﻪ( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻧﻪاي ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻊ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ اﺟﺰاء ﻣﺘﺤﺮك ﺷﻮﻧﺪ؛ در ﻏﻴﺮ اﻳﻨﺼﻮرت ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت‬-11
11. NAMEPLATE
‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ از ﻓﻮﻻد زﻧﮓ ﻧﺰن ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه‬1-11
11.1 A nameplate made of stainless steel shall be
attached on a visible portion of the conveyor,
indicating revolution speed, rated horsepower,
name of manufacturer, serial number, and year of
manufacture.
‫ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺳﺮي و‬،‫ ﻧﺎم ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه‬،‫ ﺗﻮان ﻧﺎﻣﻲ‬،‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺳﺮﻋﺖ دوران‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ روي‬،‫ﺳﺎل ﺳﺎﺧﺖ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺑﺮ آن ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ دﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺑﺴﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ و ﻳﺎ ﻗﺮﻗﺮه‬2-11
11.2 A tag plate indicating the direction of chain
sprocket and/or pulley rotation by an arrow shall
be provided near the driver.
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه‬،‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﻜﺎن ﺑﺮ آن ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد‬
AND
‫ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ و آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬-12
The conveyors completed in the fabrication shop
or field assembled shall be subjected to the
following inspections and tests after being
assembled:
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﺷﺪه در ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه‬
‫در ﻛﺎرﮔﺎه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺲ از ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪي در ﻣﻌﺮض ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻫﺎ و‬
:‫آزﻣﻮن ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
12.
CONVEYOR
TESTING
a) Visual
assemblies.
and
INSPECTION
dimensional
check
.‫اﻟﻒ( ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﭼﺸﻤﻲ و اﺑﻌﺎدي ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
of
.(‫ب( ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﺪا ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺑﻲ ﺑﺎري )ﻫﺮزﮔﺮدي‬
b) Noise level check under no load conditions.
c) Running test and performance test of
assemblies.
.‫ج( آزﻣﻮن راه اﻧﺪازي و آزﻣﻮن ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪﻫﺎ‬
d) Safety device check under no load
conditions.
.(‫د( ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺑﻲ ﺑﺎري)ﻫﺮزﮔﺮدي‬
‫ ﻣﻐﺎﻳﺮت در اﺳﻨﺎد‬-13
13. CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
‫ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻔﺎرش‬،‫در ﺻﻮرت اﺧﺘﻼف ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺪارك ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ‬
:‫ اوﻟﻮﻳﺖﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ اﻋﻤﺎل ﻣﻲﮔﺮدد‬،‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪ و اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
In the case of conflict between documents relating
to the inquiry or order, the following priority of
documents shall apply:
.‫ ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎي ﺧﺮﻳﺪ و ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات آن‬: ‫ اوﻟﻮﻳﺖ اول‬-
- First Priority: Purchase order and variations
thereto.
76
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
.‫ داده ﺑﺮگﻫﺎ و ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎ‬: ‫ اوﻟﻮﻳﺖ دوم‬-
- Second Priority: Data sheets and drawings.
.‫ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬: ‫ اوﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺳﻮم‬-
- Third Priority: This Standard
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻐﺎﻳﺮت ﻫﺎ در اﺳﻨﺎد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺼﻮرت ﻛﺘﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ارﺟﺎع‬
،‫ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار در ﺻﻮرت ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺮاي روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬.‫داده ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻣﺪارك ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪي را ﺻﺎدر ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‬
All conflicting requirements shall be referred to
the Purchaser in writing. The Purchaser will issue
confirmation document if needed for clarification
‫ آﻣﺎده ﺳﺎزي ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻤﻞ‬-14
14. PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT
‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻮع ﺣﻤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ‬1-14
14.1 Equipment shall be suitably prepared for the
type of shipment specified. The preparation shall
be mutually agreed upon and unless otherwise
specified, shall make the equipment suitable for
12 months of outdoor storage from the time of
shipment.
‫ ﻧﺤﻮه آﻣﺎده ﻛﺮدن آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ‬.‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ آﻣﺎده ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻦ رﺳﻴﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و در ﺻﻮرﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ دﻳﮕﺮي‬
2 ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﺸﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺒﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت‬
.‫ﺳﺎل از زﻣﺎن ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺷﻮ ﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞﻫﺎي ﻻزم ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻔﻆ‬2-14
14.2 The Vendor shall provide the Purchaser with
the instructions necessary to preserve the integrity
of the storage preparation after the equipment
arrives at the job site and before start-up.
‫ﻳﻜﭙﺎرﭼﮕﻲ ﻣﻮارد ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ اﻧﺒﺎرﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﭘﺲ از وارد‬
‫ﺷﺪن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎرﮔﺎه و ﭘﻴﺶ از آﻏﺎز ﺑﻜﺎر آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮاي‬
.‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
14.3 One copy of the manufacturer’s standard
installation instructions shall be packed and
shipped with the equipment.
‫ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ از دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞﻫﺎي ﻧﺼﺐ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه‬3-14
14.4 Each part of the conveyor shall be affixed
with a metal tag, indicating it’s name and part
number to facilitate assembling.
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺳﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روي ﻫﺮ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬4-14
14.5 Unless otherwise specified,
shipment of equipment is not allowed.
.‫ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺷﻮد‬، ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
،‫ﺑﺮ ﺑﺴﺖ ﻓﻠﺰي ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎم و ﺷﻤﺎره ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺑﺮ آن ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه‬
.‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺣﻤﻞ‬،‫ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮه دﻳﮕﺮي ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﺸﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬5-14
separate
.‫ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺠﺎز ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ و ﺗﻌﻬﺪ‬-15
15. GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه در ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﺧﻮد اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻧﻜﺮده ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫اﻳﻨﻄﻮر ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ و ﺗﻌﻬﺪ زﻳﺮ ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ‬
:‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در‬،‫ ﻣﺎه ﭘﺲ از ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ راه اﻧﺪازي‬12 ‫در ﺧﻼل‬
‫اﺳﺮع وﻗﺖ و ﺑﺪون ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﻣﻮاد و ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺗﻲ از‬
‫ ﻋﺪم ﻣﻬﺎرت در ﻛﺎر ﻳﺎ‬،‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﻮب ﺑﻮدن ﻣﻮاد‬
‫از ﻗﻠﻢ اﻓﺘﺎدﮔﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻫﻲ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه داراي ﻧﻘﺺ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ را‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﺪ و ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺑﻮﻳﮋه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي دﻳﮕﺮي را ﻛﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات در ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺼﺮف آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ وي‬
.‫ﭘﺮداﺧﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
Unless exception is recorded by the Vendor in his
proposal, it shall be understood that the Vendor
agrees to the following guarantees and warranties.
During a period of 12 months after the date of
commissioning, the Vendor shall, with all possible
speed and without cost to the Purchaser, replace
or repair the goods or any part thereof found to be
defective due to faulty material workmanship or
to any act or omission of the Vendor. In the
particular the Vendor shall reimburse any
transportation and other charges incurred by the
Purchaser in effecting such replacement or repair
at the point of use.
77
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
APPENDICES
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
APPENDIX A
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ اﻟﻒ‬
INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED WITH
INQUIRY OR ORDER (See Clause 5.6 in part 1)
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻔﺎرش اراﺋﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
The following particulars will enable the
manufacturer to select the most suitable
equipment from his production range to suit the
proposed application:
‫وﻳﮋﮔﻲﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه را ﻗﺎدر ﻣﻲ ﺳﺎزد ﺗﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را از داﻣﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪات ﺧﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي‬
:‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ اﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
(‫ در ﺑﺨﺶ اول‬6-5 ‫)ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻨﺪ‬
1) Maximum and minimum sizes of loads* in
millimeters.
‫( اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ و ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎ* )ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ( ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬1
2) Maximum and Minimum weights of load in
Kilograms.
‫( وزن ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ و ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎ )ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ( ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬2
3) Particulars of running surface if not flat and
rigid.
.‫( وﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎي ﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﻒ ﺑﺎري ﻛﻪ ﺗﺨﺖ و ﺳﺨﺖ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬3
4) Any special operational
including area classification.
.‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
.‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم‬
‫( ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﺎر وﻳﮋه ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﺒﻘﻪﺑﻨﺪي ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪاي از‬4
conditions
.‫ﻧﻈﺮ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬
5) Whether fixed or adjustable stands are
required.
.‫( ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮك ﻫﺎي)ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎي( ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻴﺎز اﺳﺖ‬5
6) Maximum accumulating load per 2.5 m
length, or 3 m length, in kilograms.
‫ ﻣﺘﺮ‬3 ‫ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ‬،‫ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻃﻮل‬2/5 ‫( ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﺎر ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ در ﻫﺮ‬6
7) Conditions of loading i.e. single load travel
or batching.
‫ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﺪن ﺑﺎر ﺑﺼﻮرت ﺗﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ‬،‫( ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري‬7
8) Details of any impact loading, including its
location, i.e. locally or continuously along the
track.
‫( ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﺿﺮﺑﻪ اي ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺤﻞ آن‬8
.‫ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم‬،‫ﻃﻮل‬
.‫ﺑﺼﻮرت دﺳﺘﻪ اي‬
.‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ اي ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ در ﻃﻮل ﺳﺎزه ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬
.‫( وﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺮق رﺳﺎﻧﻲ‬9
9) Electric supply characteristics.
‫( اﮔﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﺮوﻛﻲ ﻃﺮح ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﻳﺎ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬10
10) If possible, a sketch of the proposed layout,
with such details as available clearance
heights.
.‫ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ آزاد در ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻫﺎ‬
‫* اوﻟﻴﻦ اﻧﺪازه اي ﻛﻪ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ داده ﺷﻮد اﻧﺪازه ﻟﺒﻪ‬
* First Dimension Given to be that of the
Leading Edge Normal to the Direction of
Travel.
.‫ﻣﻘﺪم ﺑﺎرﻋﻤﻮد ﺑﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ آن اﺳﺖ‬
78
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
APPENDIX B
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ب‬
INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE
MANUFACTURER BEFORE PLACING THE
ORDER
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻗﺒﻞ ﺳﻔﺎرش اراﺋﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
1) Maximum and minimum sizes of loads* in
millimeters.
‫( اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ و ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎ* )ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ( ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬1
2) Maximum and minimum weights of loads in
kilograms.
‫( وزن ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ و ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎ )ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ( ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬2
3) Maximum accumulating load capability per
2.5 m length, or 3.0 m length, in kilograms.
‫ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻃﻮل ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ‬2/5 ‫( ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺎر در ﻫﺮ‬3
.‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
.‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم‬
.‫ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻃﻮل ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم‬3/0
:‫( ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ‬4
4) Rollers:
.‫اﻟﻒ( ﻃﻮل ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
a) Length in millimeters.
.‫ب( ﻗﻄﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
b) Diameter in millimeters.
.‫ج( ﮔﺎم )ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ( ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
c) Pitch(roller centers) in millimeters.
.‫د( ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
d) Thickness of tube in millimeters.
.‫ه( اﻧﺪازه ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
e) Spindle size in millimeters.
f) Type of bearing (including
arrangement if applicable).
.(‫و( ﻧﻮع ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن )ﺷﺎﻣﻞ آراﻳﺶ آب ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎ در ﺻﻮرت وﺟﻮد‬
sealing
.‫ز( روش ﻧﮕﻬﺪاﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ در ﻗﺎب‬
g) Method of retaining spindle in frame.
.‫ح(وﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎي زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ و ﻳﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬
h) Full roller chain and/or belt characteristics.
:‫( ﺳﺎزه ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬5
5) Track:
.‫اﻟﻒ( ﻧﻮع و آراﻳﺶ اﺟﺰاء ﻗﺎب‬
a) Type and arrangement of frame members.
.‫ب( ﻃﻮل ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺘﺮ‬
b) Length in meters.
.‫ج( ﻋﺮض ﻛﻠﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
c) Overall width in millimeters.
‫د( ارﺗﻔﺎع از ﻛﻒ ﺳﺎزه ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺗﺎ روي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ‬
d) Height from bottom of track to top of
roller in millimeters.
.‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
.‫ ﻧﻮع ﺟﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎزه ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬:‫( اﺗﺼﺎﻻت‬6
6) Connections: Type of coupling between
track sections.
:(‫( ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ )ﺧﺮك ﻫﺎ‬7
7) Stands:
.‫اﻟﻒ( ﻧﻮع‬
a) Type.
.‫ب( ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﺑﺎ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﺮدن( ﻳﺎ آزاد اﻳﺴﺖ‬
b) Fixed (with fixing details) or free standing.
.‫ج( ﮔﺎم ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﺮ‬
c) Pitch in meters.
79
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
:‫( ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎ )دﺳﺖ اﻧﺪازﻫﺎي( ﺣﻔﺎظ‬8
8) Guard rails:
.‫اﻟﻒ( ﻧﻮع‬
a) Type.
.‫ب( ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻛﻠﻲ از ﺑﺎﻻي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
b) Overall height from top of rollers in
millimeters.
9) Sprocket types and tooth profile.
.‫( اﻧﻮاع ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ و ﻧﻴﻤﺮخ دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ‬9
10) Electric motor driver characteristics.
.‫( وﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎي ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه‬10
‫* اوﻟﻴﻦ اﻧﺪازه اي ﻛﻪ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ داده ﺷﻮد اﻧﺪازه ﻟﺒﻪ‬
* First Dimension Given to be that of the
Leading Edge Normal to the Direction of
Travel. (to be Continued).
.(‫ )اداﻣﻪ دارد‬.‫ﻣﻘﺪم ﺑﺎر ﻋﻤﻮد ﺑﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ آن اﺳﺖ‬
80
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
9
10
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ج‬
APPENDIX C
١١
VENDOR DATA REQUIREMENTS AFTER
RECEIPT OF ORDER
١٢
‫داده ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﭘﺲ از درﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﺳﻔﺎرش اراﺋﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داده ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ را در ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻧﺴﺦ و در روزﻫﺎي‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ از درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺳﻔﺎرش ﺑﺎ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
30 ‫ داده ﻫﺎي ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻇﺮف‬.‫اراﺋﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
:‫روز ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻤﻲ ﭘﺲ از ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ و ﻋﻮدت آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﮔﺮدد‬
Vendor shall furnish the following data in the
number of copies and in the number of calendar
days agreed upon by the Purchaser after receipt of
order. Certified data shall be submitted within
thirty (30) calendar days after return of approval
for data:
.‫( ﻧﻘﺸﻪ آراﻳﺶ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬1
1) Equipment general arrangement DWG.
.‫( اﺑﻌﺎد ﻃﺮح ﻛﻠﻲ‬2
2) Outline dimensions.
.‫( ﺑﺮش ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‬3
3) Cross section.
.‫ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎر و ﻏﻴﺮه‬،‫( ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﭘﻲ رﻳﺰي‬4
4) Foundation layout, anchor bolt details, etc.
.‫(ﻧﻤﻮدارﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ‬5
5) Wiring diagrams.
6) Instrument panel layout & dimensions.
.‫(ﻛﺮوﻛﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ واﺑﻌﺎد‬6
7) Erection drawings, & diagrams.
.‫( ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎ و ﻧﻤﻮدارﻫﺎي ﺑﺮ ﭘﺎﻛﺮدن‬7
.‫(ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺼﺐ اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ‬8
8) Instrument installation DWGs.
.‫( ﺟﺪول ﻣﻮاد‬9
9) Bill of materials.
.‫( ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت‬10
10) Complete part list.
11) Recommended spare parts for 2 years
operation.
.‫( ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻳﺪﻛﻲ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺮاي دو ﺳﺎل ﻛﺎر دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬11
12)
Recommended
commissioning.
for
.‫( ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻳﺪﻛﻲ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺮاي راه اﻧﺪازي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬12
13) Instructions-installation, operation, and
maintenance manual as requested.
‫ راﻫﺒﺮي و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻃﺒﻖ‬،‫ ﻧﺼﺐ‬،‫( دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞﻫﺎي‬13
spare
parts
.‫درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ‬
81
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
48
PART THREE
SCREW CONVEYORS
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﺳﻮم‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﭽﻲ‬
82
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
CONTENTS :
Page
No
1. SCOPE………………………………………….85
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
: ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
85..........................................................‫ داﻣﻨﻪ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد‬-1
2. REFERENCES .................................................. 85
85..................................................................‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ‬-2
3. UNITS…………………………………………..86
86………………………………………….‫ واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬-3
4. DESIGN………………………………………...86
86.................................................................‫ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ‬-4
4.1 General ......................................................... 86
86 ....................................................... ‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-4
4.2 Enclosures .................................................... 86
86 ................................................... ‫ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻫﺎ‬2-4
4.3 Sizing ............................................................ 87
87 ............................................... ‫ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ اﻧﺪازه‬3-4
4.4 Components ................................................. 87
87 ......................................................... ‫ اﺟﺰاء‬4-4
4.5 Platforms and Walkways............................ 87
87 .................................... ‫ ﺳﻜﻮﻫﺎ و ﭘﻴﺎده راه ﻫﺎ‬5-4
5. MATERIAL…………………………………….88
88………………………………………………‫ ﻣﻮاد‬-5
6. NAMEPLATE ................................................... 88
88 ............................................... ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت‬-6
7. INSPECTION AND TESTING........................ 88
88 .............................................. ‫ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ و آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‬-7
8. SAFETY………………………………………...88
88…………………………………………….‫ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬-8
8.1 General ......................................................... 88
88 ....................................................... ‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-8
8.2 In the Construction Stage
(Design and Manufacture) .......................... 89
89 .................. (‫ در ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ )ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ‬2-8
8.3 During the Installation Stage
(Layout, Erection and Entry into Service). 90
‫ ﺳﻮارﻛﺮدن‬،‫ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ )ﺟﺎﻧﻤﺎﻳﻲ‬3-8
90 ................................(‫و وارد ﻛﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺖ‬
8.4 During the Utilization Stage
(Operation and Maintenance) ..................... 90
90 .... (‫ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻣﺼﺮف )ﺑﻬﺮه ﺑﺮداري و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬4-8
9 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS................ 90
90 ................................................ ‫ ﻣﻐﺎﻳﺮت در اﺳﻨﺎد‬-9
10. PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT .............. 91
91 ........................................ ‫آﻣﺎده ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻤﻞ‬-10
83
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
11. GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY ............... 91
91 ............................................. ….‫ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ و ﺗﻌﻬﺪ‬-11
APPENDICES:
:‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖﻫﺎ‬
APPENDIX A-INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED
WITH INQUIRY OR PURCHASE
ORDER ......................................... 92
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻔﺎرش‬-‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ اﻟﻒ‬
92 ........................ .‫ﻳﺎ دﺳﺘﻮر ﺧﺮﻳﺪ اراﺋﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
APPENDIX B INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED
BY THE MANUFACTURER
BEFORE PLACING THE ORDER 93
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ب اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺳﻔﺎرش‬
93 ............................................... ‫اراﺋﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
APPENDIX C VENDOR DATA REQUIREMENTS
AFTER RECEIPT OF ORDER ... 95
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ج داده ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﭘﺲ از درﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
95 ..................................... ‫ﺳﻔﺎرش اراﺋﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
84
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ داﻣﻨﻪ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد‬-1
1. SCOPE
‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬،‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ‬
‫و ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﭽﻲ و ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺑﺮاي‬
،‫ﻣﻮاد ﻓﻠﻪ اي ﺟﻬﺖ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﭘﺎﻻﻳﺸﮕﺎﻫﻲ‬
‫ ﮔﺎز و ﭘﺘﺮوﺷﻴﻤﻲ و اﻛﺘﺸﺎف و ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ و‬،‫ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎي ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ‬
.‫ﻛﺎرﻫﺎي ﺟﺪﻳﺪ را ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ وي را از‬،‫رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ و ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ آن ﺑﺎ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮرﻳﻜﻪ از ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﮕﻮي ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺎ در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﺎر‬
.‫ ﻣﺒﺮي ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬،‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
This Standard specification covers the general
requirements for the design, fabrication and
inspection of screw conveyors and screw feeders
for bulk materials, for use in refinery services,
chemical, gas and petrochemical plants and where
applicable in production and new ventures.
Compliance by the conveyor manufacturer with
the provisions of this Standard does not relieve
him of the responsibility of furnishing conveyor
and accessories of proper design, mechanically
suited to meet guarantees at the specified service
conditions.
No deviations or exceptions from this Standard
shall be permitted without the written prior
approval of the Purchaser.
‫ﺑﺪون ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﺘﺒﻲ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ اﻧﺤﺮاف ﻳﺎ اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﻳﻲ‬
.‫از اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﺠﺎز ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫اﻧﺤﺮافﻫﺎي ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮر ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪاي ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ دﻻﻳﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Intended deviations shall be separately listed by
the Vendor and supported by reasons thereof for
Purchaser consideration.
‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ‬-2
2. REFERENCES
‫در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﻪ آﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ و اﺳـﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﺗـﺎرﻳﺦ دار و‬
‫ ﺗـﺎ ﺣـﺪي ﻛـﻪ در‬،‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ‬.‫ﺑﺪون ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ زﻳﺮ اﺷﺎره ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺨـﺸﻲ از اﻳـﻦ‬،‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣـﻮرد اﺳـﺘﻔﺎده ﻗـﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘـﻪاﻧـﺪ‬
‫ وﻳـﺮاﻳﺶ‬،‫ در ﻣﺮاﺟـﻊ ﺗـﺎرﻳﺦ دار‬.‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﺤﺴﻮب ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﻣﻼك ﺑﻮده و ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮاﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺗـﺎرﻳﺦ وﻳـﺮاﻳﺶ در‬
‫ ﭘﺲ از ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎرﻓﺮﻣﺎ و ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬،‫آﻧﻬﺎ داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ آﺧﺮﻳﻦ وﻳـﺮاﻳﺶ آﻧﻬـﺎ ﺑـﻪ‬،‫ در ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ ﺑﺪون ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬.‫اﺟﺮا ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫اﻧﻀﻤﺎم ﻛﻠﻴﻪ اﺻﻼﺣﺎت و ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖﻫﺎي آن ﻣﻼك ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
Throughout this Standard the following dated and
undated standards/codes are referred to. These
referenced documents shall, to the extent specified
herein, form a part of this standard. For dated
references, the edition cited applies. The
applicability of changes in dated references that
occur after the cited date shall be mutually agreed
upon by the company and the vendor. For undated
references, the latest edition of the referenced
documents (including any supplements and
amendments) applies.
(‫ )اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻧﻔﺖ اﻳﺮان‬IPS
IPS (IRANIAN PETROLEUM STANDARDS)
IPS-E-GN-100
ASME
"‫ "اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺑﺮاي واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬IPS-E-GN-100
"Engineering Standard for
Units"
(‫ )اﻧﺠﻤﻦ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﺎن ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻚ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬ASME
(AMERICAN
SOCIETY
OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERS)
B 20.1
"Safety Standard for Conveyors
and Related Equipments"
ANSI/CEMA
(AMERICAN
NATIONAL
STANDARD INSTITUTE /
CONVEYORS EQUIPMENT
MANUFACTURERS
ASSOCIATION)
‫"اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎ و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
" ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارﻫﺎي‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎن‬
‫ﻣﻠﻲ‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ‬
‫اﻧﺠﻤﻦ‬/‫آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬
(‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻧﻮار ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬
85
B 20.1
ANSI/CEMA
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
"‫ "ﺗﻌﺎرﻳﻒ و واژﮔﺎن ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬102
102 "Conveyor Terms and Definitions"
300 "Screw
Standards"
Conveyor
"‫ "اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد اﺑﻌﺎدي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﭽﻲ‬300
Dimensional
"‫ "ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻮاد ﻓﻠﻪاي‬350
350 "Screw Conveyors for Bulk Materials"
"‫ "ردهﺑﻨﺪي و ﺗﻌﺎرﻳﻒ ﻣﻮاد ﻓﻠﻪاي‬550
550 "Classification and Definitions of Bulk
Materials"
ASTM
(AMERICAN
SOCIETY
TESTING AND MATERIAL)
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
(‫ )اﻧﺠﻤﻦ آزﻣﻮن و ﻣﻮاد آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬ASTM
FOR
‫ واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬-3
3. UNITS
،(SI) ‫ ﺑﺮﻣﺒﻨﺎي ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬،‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ ﻣﮕﺮ آﻧﻜﻪ در‬،‫ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬IPS-E-GN-100 ‫ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ﻣﺘﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﻪ واﺣﺪ دﻳﮕﺮي اﺷﺎره ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
This Standard is based on International System of
Units (SI) as per IPS-E-GN-100, except where
otherwise specified.
4. DESIGN
‫ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ‬-4
4.1 General
‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-4
4.1.1 Conveyors terminology in design shall be in
accordance with ANSI/CEMA Standard No. 102.
‫ واژﮔﺎن ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ در ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬1-1-4
4.1.2 The design classification and definitions of
bulk materials to be conveyed shall be in
accordance with ANSI/CEMA Standard No. 550.
‫ رده ﺑﻨﺪي ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﺗﻌﺎرﻳﻒ ﻣﻮاد ﻓﻠﻪاي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه‬2-1-4
4.1.3 In the handling of some toxic materials, the
enclosing trough shall be made tight enough to
contain toxic dust or vapors.
‫ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻧﺎوه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻛﺮدن ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﻣﻮاد ﺳﻤﻲ‬3-1-4
4.1.4 In addition to the requirements of this
Standard, basic considerations in design and
selection of screw conveyors and components
should be in accordance with ANSI/CEMA 350.
،‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬4-1-5
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ANSI/CEMA 102
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ANSI/CEMA 550 ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮاي در ﺑﺮﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﮔﺮد ﻳﺎ ﺑﺨﺎرﻫﺎي ﺳﻤﻲ‬
.‫درزﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﭽﻲ و‬،‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت اﺳﺎﺳﻲ در ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ‬
ANSI/CEMA 350 ‫اﺟﺰاء ﻣﺮﺑﻮط آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻫﺎ‬2-4
4.2 Enclosures
‫ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎر در درون‬1-2-4
4.2.1 Screw conveyor enclosures shall be
ANSI/CEMA No. 350 Class III-E for indoor or
sheltered service, and Class IV-E for outdoor
applications. Enclosures shall be designed to
allow access over the entire length of the
conveyor.
‫ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬III-E ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن ﻳﺎ زﻳﺮ ﺳﻘﻒ از رده‬
‫ و ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎر در ﺧﺎرج ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن از رده‬ANSI/CEMA 350
‫ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻧﻪاي ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن‬.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬IV-E
.‫دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻃﻮل ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎنﻫﺎ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ‬2-2-4
4.2.2 Outboard bearings ends with pillow block
bearings are required. Flush type bearings ends
are not acceptable.
‫ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎنﻫﺎي از ﻧﻮع اﻧﺘﻬﺎي‬.‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺘﻜﻲ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺻﺎف ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮل ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ آب ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎي اﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻧﻮع ﻛﺎﺳﻪ ﻧﻤﺪي ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬3-2-4
4.2.3 Trough end seals shall be the packed gland
type.
86
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ اﻧﺪازه‬3-4
4.3 Sizing
‫ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﻧﺎوه ﻛﻪ از‬1-3-4
4.3.1 Screw conveyors shall be sized based on a
trough loading of no greater than 30% of trough
volume with the specified lowest material bulk
density exhibited during transport by the
equipment.
‫ درﺻﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻧﺎوه ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻮده اي‬30
،‫ﻣﺎده ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ اﻧﺪازه ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
4.3.2 The use of intermediate bearings shall be
reviewed by purchaser.
‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎنﻫﺎي ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﻣﻮرد‬2-3-4
4.3.3 The use of sloped conveyors shall be
reviewed by purchaser.
‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﺷﻴﺐ دار ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار‬3-3-4
4.3.4 Screw specified feeders shall be sized based
on 95% of trough volume with the specified
lowest material bulk density exhibited during
transport by the equipment.
95 ‫ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪهﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس‬4-3-4
4.3.5 Screws for feeders shall be tapered diameter,
or variable pitch or constant diameter, to draw
material uniformly across the length of the feed
opening.
‫ ﭘﻴﭻﻫﺎي ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪهﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي ﻗﻄﺮ ﺑﺎرﻳﻚ‬5-3-4
.‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
.‫ﻣﻮرد ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫درﺻﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻧﺎوه ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﭼﻜﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻮده اي ﻣﺎده ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ در‬
‫ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ اﻧﺪازه‬،‫ﺣﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻮاد را ﺑﻄﻮر‬،‫ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺎم ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬،‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪه‬
.‫ﻳﻜﻨﻮاﺧﺖ در ﺳﺮاﺳﺮ ﻃﻮل دﻫﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻜﺸﻨﺪ‬
‫ اﺟﺰاء‬4-4
4.4 Components
4.4.1 The dimensions of components for screw
conveyors and feeders shall be determined in
accordance with ANSI/CEMA Standard No. 300
series.
‫ اﺑﻌﺎد اﺟﺰاء ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎ و ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪهﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﻖ‬1-4-4
4.4.2 Bearing materials for intermediate hangers
shall be selected with consideration to
abrasiveness and corrosiveness, together with the
characteristics of the materials to be conveyed.
Bearings will normally be selected from one of
the following four (4) types in accordance with
the design conditions:
‫ ﻣﻮاد ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي آوﻳﺰﻫﺎي ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ در ﻧﻈﺮ‬2-4-4
.‫ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬ANSI/CEMA ‫ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬NO.300 ‫ﺳﺮي‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺳﺎﺋﻴﺪﮔﻲ و ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎت ﻣﻮادي ﻛﻪ‬
‫ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً از ﻳﻜﻲ از‬.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
‫( ﻧﻮع ﻧﺎﻣﺒﺮده ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ‬4) ‫ﭼﻬﺎر‬
.‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
(‫اﻟﻒ( ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﺑﻴﺖ دار ﻳﺎ ﻣﻐﺮﻏﻲ )ﺑﺮﻧﺰي‬
a) Babbitted or bronze bearings
‫ب( ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎي ﺧﻮد رواﻧﺴﺎز‬
b) Self lubricated bearings
‫ج( ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﭼﻤﻪاي‬
c) Ball bearings
‫د( ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎي آﻫﻨﻲ ﺳﺨﺖ‬
d) Hard iron bearings
‫ ﺳﻜﻮﻫﺎ و ﭘﻴﺎده راهﻫﺎ‬5-4
4.5 Platforms and Walkways
4.5.1 Platforms shall be provided in locations
convenient for the operation and maintenance of
large inclined or vertical screw conveyors and
screw feeders.
‫ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﺑﻬﺮه ﺑﺮداري و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﺑﺰرگ‬1-5-4
4.5.2 Grating shall normally be used for platform
flooring.
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻒ ﺳﺎزي ﺳﻜﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً از ﺻﻔﺤﺎت‬2-5-4
‫و ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪهﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺷﻴﺐ دار ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻮدي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﻜﻮﻫﺎﻳﻲ‬
.‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﺸﺒﻚ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
87
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ ﭘﻴﺎده راه ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ در اﻣﺘﺪاد ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮي ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از‬3-5-4
4.5.3 Walkways shall be provided along one side
only for individual screw conveyors, and shall
have handrailing and toeplates along the outside
edge.
‫ و در اﻣﺘﺪاد ﻟﺒﻪﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫داراي ﻧﺮده دﺳﺖ اﻧﺪاز و ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﭘﺎﺧﻮر ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮاد‬-5
5. MATERIAL
‫ ﻳﺎ‬ASTM ‫ﻣﻮاد ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ﻣﻌﺎدل آن ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
Conveyor materials shall be selected according to
ASTM Standard specifications or equivalent.
‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت‬-6
6. NAME PLATE
6.1 A nameplate made of stainless steel shall be
attached on a visible portion of the equipment,
indicating revolution speed, rated horsepower, etc.
‫ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت از ﺟﻨﺲ ﻓﻮﻻد زﻧﮓ ﻧﺰن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ‬1-6
6.2 A tag plate indicating the direction of screw
rotation by arrow shall be provided near the
driver.
‫ ورﻗﻪ ﺑﺮﺑﺴﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﻜﺎن روي‬2-6
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ دﻳﺪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮدد ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ روي آن ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
.‫ ﻏﻴﺮه ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ ﺗﻮان ﻧﺎﻣﻲ‬،‫دوران‬
.‫آن ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ و آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‬-7
7. INSPECTION AND TESTING
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎ و ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪهﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﺷﺪه در ﻛﺎرﮔﺎه‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه در ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎرﮔﺎه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺲ از ﺳﺮﻫﻢ‬
:‫ﺑﺴﺘﻦ در ﻣﻌﺮض آزﻣﻮن ﻫﺎ و ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
The screw conveyors and feeders completed in the
fabrication shop or field assembled shall be
subjected to the following tests and inspections
after being assembled.
1) Visual and dimensional check of assemblies
2) Noise level check under no load conditions
3) Running test and performance test of
assemblies
4) Safety device check under no load
conditions
‫( ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﭼﺸﻤﻲ و اﺑﻌﺎدي ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬1
(‫( ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﺪا ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺑﺪون ﺑﺎر )ﻫﺮزﮔﺮد‬2
‫( آزﻣﻮن ﻛﺎراﻧﺪازي و آزﻣﻮن ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬3
(‫( ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺑﺪون ﺑﺎر )ﻫﺮزﮔﺮد‬4
8. SAFETY
‫ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬-8
8.1 General
‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-8
Screw conveyors and feeders shall be designed
with safety provisions for the protection of
operating personnel, in accordance with ASME B
20.1.
ASME B20.1 ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎ و ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪهﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﻖ‬
In addition to the safety rules set out in ASME B
20.1, each part of the safety code in this Standard
is divided into three clauses dealing with the
safety rules applying to the following stages:
‫ ﻫﺮ‬،ASME B20.1 ‫ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮ ﻣﻘﺮرات اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪه در‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ از آﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺮرات اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ در ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ زﻳﺮ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد‬
:‫دارد‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻛﺎرﻛﻨﺎن ﺑﻬﺮه ﺑﺮداري ﺑﺎ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﻮارد‬
.‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
(‫اﻟﻒ( ﺳﺎﺧﺖ )ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ‬
a) Construction (design and manufacture)
(‫ ﺳﻮارﻛﺮدن و ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬،‫ب( ﻧﺼﺐ )ﺟﺎﻧﻤﺎﻳﻲ‬
b) Installation (layout, erection and entry into
service)
c) Utilization (operation and maintenance)
(‫ج( ﻣﺼﺮف )ﺑﻬﺮه ﺑﺮداري و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
88
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
8.2 In the Construction Stage (Design and
Manufacture)
(‫ در ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ )ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ‬2-8
8.2.1 The constructional features and quality of
screw conveyors and feeders shall be determined
on the basis of their intended service life and
condition of usage.
‫ ﺟﻨﺒﻪﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ و ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎ و ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬1-2-8
8.2.2 Screw conveyors and feeders shall be
capable of operation within the specified noise
limits or statutory requirements.
‫ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎ و ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪهﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮاي‬2-2-8
8.2.3 Upper openings of troughed appliances shall
be guarded, apart from feed and discharge areas.
‫ دﻫﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ دﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎي ﻧﺎوه دار ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺪا از‬3-2-8
8.2.4 The opening of covers, inspection doors and
the covers of such protective devices as are liable
to expose the screw elements while the machinery
is in operation shall be prevented by means of
locking.
‫ درﻳﭽﻪﻫﺎي‬،‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪن درﭘﻮﺷﻬﺎ‬4-2-8
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪهﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﻋﻤﺮ ﻛﺎري و ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد‬
.‫ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮاي آﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻦ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻛﺎرﻛﺮدن در ﻣﺤﺪوده ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﺪاي ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه ﻳﺎ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت‬
.‫ﻣﻘﺮر ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻧﻮاﺣﻲ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ و ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﻔﺎظ دار ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ و ﭘﻮﺷﺶﻫﺎي وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﻬﺮهﺑﺮداري از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ آﻻت ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎن ﺷﺪن اﺟﺰاء‬
.‫ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ آﻧﻬﺎ را ﻗﻔﻞ ﻧﻤﻮد‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺻﻼح ﺑﺮ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺧﻮد را ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﺎز‬
‫داﻧﺴﺘﻦ ﺑﺎزﺷﺪن درﻳﭽﻪﻫﺎي ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻳﺎ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﻬﺮه ﺑﺮداري از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ آﻻت ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎن‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻛﺘﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه اﻋﻼم‬،‫ﺷﺪن اﺟﺰاء ﭘﻴﭻ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
‫ در آن ﺻﻮرت ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺎ اﺟﺰاء‬،‫ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﺎظ ﻫﺎي ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد ﻳﻚ ﺗﻮري ﻛﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﺳﻮراﺧﻬﺎي آن‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺜﺎل‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻧﻜﻨﺪ در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ دﺳﺖ ﻛﻢ‬40 × ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬40 ‫از‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي از ﻟﺒﻪ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮدد‬100
Should the user notify the constructor in writing
that he intends to allow the opening of inspection
doors or such protective devices as are liable to
expose the screw elements while the machinery is
in operation, fixed guards must be provided to
prevent any contact with the screw elements.
For example, a screen with openings not
exceeding 40 mm × 40 mm should be fitted at a
minimum distance of 100 mm from the screw
edge.
‫ دﻫﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎي ورودي و ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪاي ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ‬5-2-8
8.2.5 Inlet and outlet apertures shall be so
designed as to prevent free access to moving
parts. Otherwise, provision shall be made for
suitable protective guards.
.‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ از دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ آزاد ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺘﺤﺮك ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻫﺎي ﻻزم ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﺎظﻫﺎي‬،‫در ﻏﻴﺮ اﻳﻨﺼﻮرت‬
.‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺻﻮرت ﮔﻴﺮد‬
8.2.6 Lubrication of intermediate screw bearings
shall be possible without removing the trough or
cover of conveyors.
‫ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎي ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺪون‬6-2-8
8.2.7 For cleaning purposes, removable protective
panels shall be fitted on the base of conveyors.
‫ ﺑﺮاي اﻳﺠﺎد اﻣﻜﺎن ﺗﻤﻴﺰﻛﺎري ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ‬7-2-8
8.2.8 Should a screw conveyor be required to
convey dangerous or harmful products, the user
shall notify the constructor and specify what
special safety features are needed in the design of
the equipment.
‫ اﮔﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﺮدن ﻓﺮآوردهﻫﺎي زﻳﺎﻧﺒﺎر ﻳﺎ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك‬8-2-8
.‫ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﻧﺎوه ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎ اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪهاي ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ روي ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎزﻛﺮدن‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻳﺎدآوري ﻛﺮده و‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﻧﻴﺎزﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻨﺒﻪﻫﺎي اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز در ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬
.‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
89
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
For example where the possibility of fire or
explosion exists, the pitch of the intermediate
bearings shall ensure that the screw cannot touch
the inside of the casing.
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺜﺎل در ﺟﺎﻳﻴﻜﻪ اﺣﺘﻤﺎل آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي ﻳﺎ اﻧﻔﺠﺎر وﺟﻮد‬
‫ ﮔﺎم ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎي ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮري ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎ‬،‫دارد‬
.‫ﺳﻄﺢ داﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس ﭘﻴﺪا ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‬
8.3 During the Installation Stage (Layout,
Erection and Entry into Service)
‫ ﺳﻮارﻛﺮدن و ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬،‫ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ )ﺟﺎﻧﻤﺎﻳﻲ‬3-8
8.3.1 Screw conveyors shall be fed regularly by
appropriately designed devices.
‫ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺑﺎ وﺳﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺼﻮرت‬1-3-8
8.3.2 If the vertical screw conveyor is equipped
with a hand-operated variable-speed drive, and if
the controls are more than 1.5 m above operating
level, a fixed means of access shall be provided.
‫ اﮔﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﻋﻤﻮدي ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه دﺳﺘﻲ‬2-3-8
8.4 During the Utilization Stage (Operation
and Maintenance)
(‫ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻣﺼﺮف )ﺑﻬﺮه ﺑﺮداري و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬4-8
8.4.1 In compliance with the existing regulations
the personnel shall not be allowed to clean the
inside of the trough or carry out any other
inspection therein without first having stopped the
screw and rendered the starting devices
inoperative.
‫ ﻛﺎرﻛﻨﺎن ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ اﺑﺘﺪا‬،‫ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﻘﺮرات ﻣﻮﺟﻮد‬1-4-8
8.4.2 However, should the screw conveyor fail to
start again normally due to blockage, it shall be
possible to reverse it.
‫ اﮔﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ در اﺛﺮ‬،‫ ﺑﻬﺮﺣﺎل‬2-4-8
8.4.3 Free access to the unprotected rotating part
of a screw shall be forbidden to all persons other
than the supervisory and maintenance personnel.
No action shall be taken by the latter without
having first stopped the screw and taken all
precautions to prevent it being prematurely started
up.
،‫ ﻏﻴﺮ از ﻛﺎرﻛﻨﺎن ﺳﺮﭘﺮﺳﺘﻲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬3-4-8
(‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
.‫ ﺗﻐﺪﻳﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬،‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﺪهاﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺘﺮ‬1/5 ‫ و اﮔﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬،‫داراي ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ از ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﻬﺮه ﺑﺮداري ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺑﺪون ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﺮدن ﭘﻴﭻ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ و ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن وﺳﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ داﺧﻞ ﻧﺎوه را ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ‬،‫ﺑﻜﺎراﻧﺪاز دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬
.‫دﻳﮕﺮي را در آن اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻨﺪ‬
‫ در اﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﻌﻤﻮل دوﺑﺎره ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻧﻴﺎﻓﺘﺪ‬
‫اﻣﻜﺎن ﻛﺎراﻧﺪازي ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن آن وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ آزاد ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﭼﺮﺧﻨﺪه ﻏﻴﺮ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺪه ﭘﻴﭻ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬
‫ ﻛﺎرﻛﻨﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ‬.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي اﺷﺨﺎص دﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫آﻧﻬﺎ در ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه آزاد داﻧﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺪون اﻳﻨﻜﻪ‬
‫اﺑﺘﺪا ﭘﻴﭻ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ را ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﺮده و اﺣﺘﻴﺎط ﻫﺎي ﻻزم را ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ ﻫﻴﭻ‬،‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﺑﻜﺎر اﻓﺘﺎدن ﻧﺎﺑﻬﻨﮕﺎم آن ﺑﻌﻤﻞ آورده ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻋﻤﻠﻲ را اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻐﺎﻳﺮت در اﺳﻨﺎد‬-9
9.CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
‫در ﺻﻮرت وﺟﻮد اﺧﺘﻼف و ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺾ در اﺳﻨﺎد و ﻣﺪارك ﻣﺮﺑﻮط‬
‫ اﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ در ﻣﻮرد ﻣﺪارك‬،‫ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﻌﻼم ﻳﺎ ﺳﻔﺎرش ﺧﺮﻳﺪ‬
:‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
In the case of conflict between documents relating
to the inquiry or order, the following priority of
documents shall apply:
- First Priority:
variations thereto.
Purchase
order
‫ ﺳﻔﺎرش ﺧﺮﻳﺪ و ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات داده ﺷﺪه در‬:‫ اوﻟﻮﻳﺖ اول‬-
and
.‫آﻧﻬﺎ‬
- Second Priority: Data sheets and drawings.
- Third Priority:
specification.
This
.‫ داده ﺑﺮگﻫﺎ و ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎ‬: ‫ اوﻟﻮﻳﺖ دوم‬-
Standard
.‫ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬: ‫ اوﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺳﻮم‬-
90
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
.‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻐﺎﻳﺮت ﻫﺎ در اﺳﻨﺎد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺘﺒﺎً ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ارﺟﺎع داده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻣﺪارك‬،‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪار در ﺻﻮرت ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺮاي روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
.‫ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪي را ﺻﺎدر ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‬
All conflicting requirements shall be referred to
the Purchaser in writing. The Purchaser will issue
confirmation document if needed for clarification.
‫آﻣﺎده ﺳﺎزي ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻤﻞ‬-10
10. PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT
10.1 Equipment shall be suitably prepared for the
type of shipment specified. The preparation shall
be mutually agreed upon and unless otherwise
specified, shall make the equipment suitable for
2 years of outdoor storage from the time of
shipment.
‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه‬1-10
10.2 The Vendor shall provide the Purchaser with
the instructions necessary to preserve the integrity
of the storage preparation after the equipment
arrives at the job site and before start-up.
‫ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻻزم را ﺑﺮاي ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ‬2-10
10.3 Each part of the conveyor shall be affixed
with a metal tag, indicating it’s name and part
number to facilitate assembling.
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺳﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روي ﻫﺮ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬3-10
10.4 One copy of the manufacturer’s standard
installation instructions shall be packed and
shipped with the equipment.
‫ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ از دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه‬4-10
10.5 Unless otherwise specified,
shipment of equipment is not allowed.
‫ ﺣﻤﻞ‬، ‫ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ دﻳﮕﺮي ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﺸﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬5-10
‫ ﻧﺤﻮه آﻣﺎده ﻛﺮدن آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻦ‬.‫اﺳﺖ آﻣﺎده ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫رﺳﻴﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و در ﺻﻮرﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ دﻳﮕﺮي ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﺸﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﺎل از‬2 ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺒﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺤﻴﻂ آزاد ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت‬
.‫زﻣﺎن ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻴﺖ ﻣﻮارد ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ اﻧﺒﺎرﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﭘﺲ از وارد ﺷﺪن‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎرﮔﺎه و ﻗﺒﻞ از آﻏﺎز ﺑﻜﺎر آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﺧﺮﻳﺪار‬
.‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬،‫ﺑﺮﺑﺴﺖ ﻓﻠﺰي ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎم و ﺷﻤﺎره ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺑﺮ آن ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه‬
.‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬، ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
separate
.‫ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺠﺎز ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ و ﺗﻌﻬﺪ‬-11
11. GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه در ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﺧﻮد ﻣﺴﺘﺜﻨﻲ ﻧﻜﺮده ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫اﻳﻨﻄﻮر ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ و ﺗﻌﻬﺪات زﻳﺮ ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ‬
:‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ‬،‫ ﻣﺎه ﭘﺲ از ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ راه اﻧﺪازي‬12 ‫در ﺧﻼل‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺗﻤﺎم ﺗﺮ و ﺑﺪون ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﻣﻮاد و‬
‫ ﻋﺪم ﻣﻬﺎرت‬،‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺗﻲ از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﻮب ﺑﻮدن ﻣﻮاد‬
‫در ﻛﺎر ﻳﺎ از ﻗﻠﻢ اﻓﺘﺎدﮔﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻫﻲ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه داراي ﻧﻘﺺ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ را ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﺪ و ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺑﻮﻳﮋه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي دﻳﮕﺮي را ﻛﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات در ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺼﺮف آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺪه‬
.‫اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ وي ﭘﺮداﺧﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
Unless exception is recorded by the Vendor in his
proposal, it shall be understood that the Vendor
agrees to the following guarantee and warranties:
During a period of 12 months after the date of
commissioning, the Vendor shall, with all possible
speed and without cost to the Purchaser, replace
or repair the goods or any part thereof found to be
defective due to faulty material, workmanship or
to any act or omission of the Vendor. In the
particular the Vendor shall reimburse any
transportation and other charges incurred by the
Purchaser in effecting such replacement or repair
at the point of use.
91
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
APPENDICES
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
APPENDIX A
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ اﻟﻒ‬
INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED WITH
INQUIRY OR PURCHASE ORDER
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻔﺎرش ﻳﺎ دﺳﺘﻮر ﺧﺮﻳﺪ اراﺋﻪ‬
The following particulars will enable the
manufacturer to select the most suitable
equipment from his production range to suit the
proposed application:
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت وﻳﮋه زﻳﺮ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه را ﻗﺎدر ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را از داﻣﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪات ﺧﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎرﺑﺮدﻫﺎي‬
:‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ اﺳﺖ راﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
13
14
15
١۶
١٧
‫ﺷﻮد‬
.‫( وﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎي ﺑﺮق رﺳﺎﻧﻲ‬1
1) Electric supply characteristics.
2) Bulk density of the material to be conveyed.
.‫( ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻮده اي ﻣﺎدهاي ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮد‬2
3) Any special operational conditions (such as
in high temperatures, or in dusty, corrosive or
abrasive atmospheres, or in humid or wet
conditions, or on exposed sites).
‫( ﻫﺮ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﺎري ﻣﺨﺼﻮص )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻛﺎرﻛﺮدن در دﻣﺎي‬3
4) If possible, a sketch of the proposed layout,
with such details as available clearance
heights.
‫ ﻛﺮوﻛﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺎ‬،‫( در ﺻﻮرت اﻣﻜﺎن‬4
‫ ﺧﻮرﻧﺪه ﻳﺎ‬،‫ ﻳﺎ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي داراي ﮔﺮد و ﺧﺎك‬،‫ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ ﻳﺎ در ﻛﺎرﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎي در‬،‫ ﻳﺎ داراي ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﺮﻃﻮب‬،‫ﺳﺎﻳﻨﺪه‬
.‫ﻣﻌﺮض دﻳﺪ‬
.‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻫﺎي آزاد ﻣﻮﺟﻮد‬
92
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
APPENDIX B
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ب‬
INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE
MANUFACTURER BEFORE PLACING THE
ORDER
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻗﺒﻞ ﺳﻔﺎرش اراﺋﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
1) Maximum and minimum sizes of loads* in
millimeters.
‫( اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ و ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎ* )ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ( ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬1
2) Maximum and minimum weights of loads in
kilograms.
‫( وزن ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ و ﻛﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎ )ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ( ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬2
3) Maximum accumulating load capability per
2.5 m length, or 3.0 m length, in kilograms.
‫ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻃﻮل ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ‬2/5 ‫( ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺎر در ﻫﺮ‬3
.‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
.‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم‬
.‫ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻃﻮل ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم‬3/0
:‫( ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ‬4
4) Rollers:
.‫اﻟﻒ( ﻃﻮل ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
a) Length in millimeters.
.‫ب( ﻗﻄﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
b) Diameter in millimeters.
.‫ج( ﮔﺎم )ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ( ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
c) Pitch(roller centers) in millimeters.
.‫د( ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
d) Thickness of tube in millimeters.
.‫ه( اﻧﺪازه ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
e) Spindle size in millimeters.
f) Type of bearing (including
arrangement if applicable).
.(‫و( ﻧﻮع ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن )ﺷﺎﻣﻞ آراﻳﺶ آب ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎ در ﺻﻮرت وﺟﻮد‬
sealing
.‫ز( روش ﻧﮕﻬﺪاﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ در ﻗﺎب‬
g) Method of retaining spindle in frame.
.‫ح(وﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎي زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ و ﻳﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬
h) Full roller chain and/or belt characteristics.
:‫( ﺳﺎزه ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬5
5) Track:
.‫اﻟﻒ( ﻧﻮع و آراﻳﺶ اﺟﺰاء ﻗﺎب‬
a) Type and arrangement of frame members.
.‫ب( ﻃﻮل ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺘﺮ‬
b) Length in meters.
.‫ج( ﻋﺮض ﻛﻠﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
c) Overall width in millimeters.
‫د( ارﺗﻔﺎع از ﻛﻒ ﺳﺎزه ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺗﺎ روي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ‬
d) Height from bottom of track to top of
roller in millimeters.
.‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
.‫ ﻧﻮع ﺟﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎزه ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬:‫( اﺗﺼﺎﻻت‬6
6) Connections: Type of coupling between
track sections.
:(‫( ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ )ﺧﺮك ﻫﺎ‬7
7) Stands:
.‫اﻟﻒ( ﻧﻮع‬
a) Type.
.‫ب( ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﺑﺎ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﺮدن( ﻳﺎ آزاد اﻳﺴﺖ‬
b) Fixed (with fixing details) or free standing.
.‫ج( ﮔﺎم ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﺮ‬
c) Pitch in meters.
93
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
:‫( ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎ )دﺳﺖ اﻧﺪازﻫﺎي( ﺣﻔﺎظ‬8
8) Guard rails:
.‫اﻟﻒ( ﻧﻮع‬
a) Type.
.‫ب( ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻛﻠﻲ از ﺑﺎﻻي ﻏﻠﺘﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
b) Overall height from top of rollers in
millimeters.
9) Sprocket types and tooth profile.
.‫( اﻧﻮاع ﭼﺮخ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ و ﻧﻴﻤﺮخ دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ‬9
10) Electric motor driver characteristics.
.‫( وﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎي ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه‬10
‫* اوﻟﻴﻦ اﻧﺪازه اي ﻛﻪ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ داده ﺷﻮد اﻧﺪازه ﻟﺒﻪ‬
* First Dimension Given to be that of the
Leading Edge Normal to the Direction of
Travel. (to be Continued).
.(‫ )اداﻣﻪ دارد‬.‫ﻣﻘﺪم ﺑﺎر ﻋﻤﻮد ﺑﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ آن اﺳﺖ‬
94
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
18
19
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ج‬
APPENDIX C
٢٠
VENDOR DATA REQUIREMENTS AFTER
RECEIPT OF ORDER
٢١
‫داده ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﭘﺲ از درﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﺳﻔﺎرش اراﺋﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داده ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ را در ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻧﺴﺦ و در روزﻫﺎي‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ از درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺳﻔﺎرش ﺑﺎ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
30 ‫ داده ﻫﺎي ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻇﺮف‬.‫اراﺋﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
:‫روز ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻤﻲ ﭘﺲ از ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ و ﻋﻮدت آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺷﻮد‬
Vendor shall furnish the following data in the
number or copies and in the number of calendar
days agreed upon by the Purchaser after receipt of
order. Certified data shall be submitted within
thirty (30) calendar days after return of approval
for data:
. DWG ‫( ﻧﻘﺸﻪ آراﻳﺶ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬1
1) Equipment general arrangement DWG.
.‫( اﺑﻌﺎد ﻃﺮح ﻛﻠﻲ‬2
2) Outline dimensions.
.‫( ﺑﺮش ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‬3
3) Cross section.
.‫ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎر و ﻏﻴﺮه‬،‫( ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﭘﻲ رﻳﺰي‬4
4) Foundation layout, anchor bolt details, etc.
.‫(ﻧﻤﻮدارﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ‬5
5) Wiring diagrams.
6) Instrument panel layout & dimensions.
.‫(ﻛﺮوﻛﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ و اﺑﻌﺎد‬6
7) Erection drawings, & diagrams.
.‫( ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎ و ﻧﻤﻮدارﻫﺎي ﺑﺮ ﭘﺎﻛﺮدن‬7
.‫( ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺼﺐ اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ‬8
8) Instrument installation DWGs.
.‫( ﺟﺪول ﻣﻮاد‬9
9) Bill of materials.
.‫( ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت‬10
10) Complete part list.
11) Recommended spare parts for 2 years
operation.
.‫( ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻳﺪﻛﻲ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺮاي دو ﺳﺎل ﻛﺎر دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬11
12)
for
.‫( ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻳﺪﻛﻲ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺮاي راه اﻧﺪازي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬12
13) Completed specification sheets giving
manufacturer, size, type of model of
specific equipment.
،‫(ﺑﺮﮔﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﺷﺪه ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎم ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه‬13
14) Instructions, installation, operation, and
maintenance manual as requested.
‫ راﻫﺒﺮي و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬،‫ ﻧﺼﺐ‬،‫( دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞﻫﺎي راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬14
Recommended
commissioning.
spare
parts
.‫ ﻧﻮع ﻣﺪل وﻳﮋه ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﺪ‬،‫اﻧﺪازه‬
.‫ﻃﺒﻖ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ‬
95
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
49
PART FOUR
BELT CONVEYORS
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﭼﻬﺎر‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﺗﺴﻤﻪاي‬
96
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫)‪IPS-M-GN-210(1‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ ‪Mar. 2009/ 1388‬‬
‫‪Page‬‬
‫‪No‬‬
‫‪CONTENTS :‬‬
‫‪1. SCOPE................................................................ 99‬‬
‫‪ -1‬داﻣﻨﻪ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد ‪99 ......................................................‬‬
‫‪2. REFERENCES .................................................. 99‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ ‪99 .............................................................‬‬
‫‪3. UNITS................................................................. 100‬‬
‫‪ -3‬واﺣﺪﻫﺎ ‪100 ............................................................‬‬
‫‪4. DESIGN.............................................................. 100‬‬
‫‪-4‬ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ‪100 .............................................................‬‬
‫‪4.1 General ......................................................... 100‬‬
‫‪ 1-4‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ‪100 .......................................................‬‬
‫‪4.2 Belts .............................................................. 100‬‬
‫‪ 2-4‬ﺗﺴﻤﻪﻫﺎ‪100 ......................................................‬‬
‫‪4.3 Pulleys .......................................................... 101‬‬
‫‪ 3-4‬ﻗﺮﻗﺮه ﻫﺎ ‪101 ....................................................‬‬
‫‪4.4 Idlers............................................................. 101‬‬
‫‪ 4-4‬ﻫﺮزﮔﺮدﻫﺎ ‪101 ...................................................‬‬
‫‪4.5 Take-up ........................................................ 102‬‬
‫‪ 5-4‬ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه )ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻦ( ‪102 ................................‬‬
‫‪4.6 Drivers and Transmissions......................... 102‬‬
‫‪ 6-4‬ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪهﻫﺎ و دﺳﺘﮕﺎهﻫﺎي اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻧﻴﺮو ‪102 ..............‬‬
‫‪5. CONVEYOR ACCESSORIES......................... 103‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ‪103 ...............................................‬‬
‫‪5.1 Backstop and Braking Devices................... 103‬‬
‫‪ 1-5‬وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﺴﺒﻨﺪ )ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ( و وﺳﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪103 ..................................................‬‬
‫‪5.2 Pull Cord Switches ...................................... 103‬‬
‫‪ 2-5‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي داراي ﺑﻨﺪ ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ‪103 ...........................‬‬
‫‪5.3 Belt Cleaning Device ................................... 103‬‬
‫‪ 3-5‬وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ‪103 ................................‬‬
‫‪5.4 Chute and Feeder ........................................ 103‬‬
‫‪ 4-5‬ﺳﺮﺳﺮه و ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ‪103 ..................................‬‬
‫‪5.5 Tripper and Scraper ................................... 103‬‬
‫‪ 5-5‬ﺑﺎررﻳﺰ )ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎر( و ﻟﻴﺴﻪ‪103 .......................‬‬
‫‪5.6 Conveyor Covers and Decks....................... 103‬‬
‫‪ 6-5‬ﺳﺮﭘﻮشﻫﺎ و ﭘﻮﺷﺶﻫﺎي ﺳﻘﻔﻲ‬
‫)ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎي ( ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ‪103 ........................................‬‬
‫‪5.7 Name plate ................................................... 104‬‬
‫‪ 7-5‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ‪104 .........................................‬‬
‫‪6. STEEL STRUCTURES .................................... 104‬‬
‫‪-6‬ﺳﺎزهﻫﺎي ﻓﻮﻻدي ‪104 ................................................‬‬
‫‪6.1 Frame ........................................................... 104‬‬
‫‪ 1-6‬ﻗﺎب ‪104 ...........................................................‬‬
‫‪97‬‬
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
6.2 Platforms, Walkway.................................... 104
104 ....................................... ‫ ﭘﻴﺎده راهﻫﺎ‬،‫ ﺳﻜﻮﻫﺎ‬2-6
7. MATERIALS..................................................... 105
105 ................................................................ ‫ ﻣﻮاد‬-7
8. SAFETY ............................................................. 105
105 .............................................................. ‫ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬-8
9. INSPECTION AND TESTING........................ 105
105 .............................................. ‫ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ و آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‬-9
10. CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS............. 105
105 ............................................... ‫ ﻣﻐﺎﻳﺮت در اﺳﻨﺎد‬-10
11. PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT .............. 105
105 ....................................... ‫ آﻣﺎده ﺳﺎزي ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻤﻞ‬-11
12. GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY ............... 106
106 .................................................. ‫ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ و ﺗﻌﻬﺪ‬-12
APPENDICES:
:‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
APPENDIX A INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED
WITH INQUIRY OR ORDER.... 107
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ اﻟﻒ اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻔﺎرش‬
107 ............................................. .‫اراﺋﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
APPENDIX B Information to be Supplied by
Manufacturer before Placing the
Order ............................................. 108
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ب اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻧﺠﺎم ﺳﻔﺎرش ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
108 .................................... ‫ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه اراﺋﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
APPENDIX C Vendor Data Requirements after
Receipt of Order .......................... 109
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ج دادهﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﭘﺲ از درﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
109 .....................................‫ﺳﻔﺎرش اراﺋﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
98
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ داﻣﻨﻪ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد‬-1
1. SCOPE
‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬،‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ‬
‫و ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﺗﺴﻤﻪاي ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻮاد ﻓﻠﻪاي را ﺟﻬﺖ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫ ﮔﺎز و‬،‫ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﺠﺎت ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ‬،‫در ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﭘﺎﻻﻳﺸﮕﺎﻫﻲ‬
‫ﭘﺘﺮوﺷﻴﻤﻲ و ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻳﻴﻜﻪ در ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ و ﻛﺎرﻫﺎي ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد دارد‬
.‫را ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ وي را از‬،‫رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ و ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ آن ﺑﺎ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮرﻳﻜﻪ از ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﮕﻮي ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺎ در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﺎر‬
.‫ ﻣﺒﺮي ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬،‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
This Standard specification covers the general
requirements for the design, fabrication and
inspection of belt conveyors for bulk materials,
for use in refinery services, chemical, gas and
petrochemical plants and where applicable in
production and new ventures.
Compliance by the conveyor manufacturer with
the provisions of this Standard does not relieve
him of the responsibility of furnishing conveyor
and accessories of proper design, mechanically
suited to meet guarantees at the specified service
conditions.
‫ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ اﻧﺤﺮاف ﻳﺎ اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء از اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﺪون ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﺘﺒﻲ‬
.‫ﻗﺒﻠﻲ از ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﻣﺠﺎز ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫اﻧﺤﺮاف ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ دﻻﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ و رﺳﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه‬
.‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ و ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﻮد‬
No deviations or exceptions from this Standard
shall be permitted without the written prior
approval of the Purchaser.
Intended deviations shall be separately listed by
the Vendor and supported by reasons thereof for
Purchaser consideration.
‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ‬-2
2. REFERENCES
‫در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﻪ آﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ و اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ دار و‬
‫ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪي ﻛﻪ در‬،‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ‬.‫ﺑﺪون ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ زﻳﺮ اﺷﺎره ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از اﻳﻦ‬،‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪاﻧﺪ‬
‫ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ‬،‫ در ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ دار‬.‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﺤﺴﻮب ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﻣﻼك ﺑﻮده و ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮاﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ در‬
‫ ﭘﺲ از ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎرﻓﺮﻣﺎ و ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬،‫آﻧﻬﺎ داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ آﺧﺮﻳﻦ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ‬،‫ در ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ ﺑﺪون ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬.‫اﺟﺮا ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫اﻧﻀﻤﺎم ﻛﻠﻴﻪ اﺻﻼﺣﺎت و ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖﻫﺎي آن ﻣﻼك ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
Throughout this Standard the following dated and
undated standards/codes are referred to. These
referenced documents shall, to the extent specified
herein, form a part of this standard. For dated
references, the edition cited applies. The
applicability of changes in dated references that
occur after the cited date shall be mutually agreed
upon by the company and the vendor. For undated
references, the latest edition of the referenced
documents (including any supplements and
amendments) applies.
AISC
(‫ )آﺋﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﺎزه ﻫﺎي ﻓﻠﺰي آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬AISC
(AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL
CONSTRUCTION)
ANSI/CEMA
/ ‫ )ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ ﻣﻠﻲ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬ANSI/CEMA
(AMERICAN
NATIONAL
STANDARDS INSTITUTE
/CONVEYORS
EQUIPMENT
MANUFACTURERS
ASSOCIATION)
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
"‫ "ﺗﻌﺎرﻳﻒ و واژﮔﺎن ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬102
" ‫ " ﻫﺮزﮔﺮدﻫﺎي ﻧﺎوه اي ﻛﻨﻨﺪه و ﺑﺮﮔﺮدان‬502
502 "Troughing and Return Idlers"
550
‫اﻧﺠﻤﻦ‬
(‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎ‬
102 "Conveyor Terms and Definitions"
402
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎن‬
"Belt Conveyors"
"Classification and Definitions of Bulk
Materials"
99
"‫"ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﺗﺴﻤﻪاي‬
402
"‫"رده ﺑﻨﺪي و ﺗﻌﺎرﻳﻒ ﻣﻮاد ﻓﻠﻪاي‬
550
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
‫ اﻧﺠﻤﻦ‬/ ‫ )ﻣﺆﺳﺴﻪ ﻣﻠﻲ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬ANSI/MPTA
ANSI/MPTA (AMERICAN
NATIONAL
STANDARD INSTITUTE /
MECHANICAL
POWER
TRANSMISSION
ASSOCIATION)
ANSI/MPTA 301
B 20.1
(‫اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ "ﻗﺮﻗﺮهﻫﺎي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻮﻻدي ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري‬ANSI/MPTA 301
"‫ﺷﺪه‬
"Welded Steel Conveyor
Pulleys"
ASME (AMERICAN
SOCIETY
MECHANICAL ENGINEERS)
(‫ )اﻧﺠﻤﻦ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﺎن ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻚ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬ASME
OF
‫ "اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎ و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬B 20.1
"‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮط‬
"Safety Standard for Conveyors and
Related Equipment"
ASTM (AMERICAN
SOCIETY
TESTING AND MATERIALS)
(‫ )اﻧﺠﻤﻦ آزﻣﻮن و ﻣﻮاد آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬ASTM
FOR
(‫ )اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻧﻔﺖ اﻳﺮان‬IPS
IPS (IRANIAN PETROLEUM STANDARDS)
IPS-E-GN-100
"Engineering
for Units"
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
"‫ "اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺑﺮاي واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬IPS-E-GN-100
Standard
3. UNITS
This Standard is based on International System of
Units (SI) as per IPS-E-GN-100, except where
otherwise specified.
‫ واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬-3
،(SI) ‫ ﺑﺮﻣﺒﻨﺎي ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬،‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ ﻣﮕﺮ آﻧﻜﻪ در‬،‫ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬IPS-E-GN-100 ‫ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ﻣﺘﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﻪ واﺣﺪ دﻳﮕﺮي اﺷﺎره ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
4. DESIGN
‫ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ‬-4
4.1 General
‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-4
4.1.1 Conveyor terminology in design shall be in
accordance with ANSI/CEMA Standard No. 102
and ANSI/CEMA 402.
‫ واژﮔﺎن ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ در ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي‬1-1-4
4.1.2 The classification and definition of bulk
materials to be conveyed in design shall be
employed in accordance with ANSI/CEMA
Standard No. 550.
‫ رده ﺑﻨﺪي و ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ در ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻣﻮاد ﻓﻠﻪ اي ﺑﺮاي‬2-1-4
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ANSI/CEMA 402 ‫ و‬ANSI/CEMA 102
ANSI/CEMA NO 550 ‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﺪن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
4.1.3 The speed and width of the belt on the
conveyor shall be determined on the basis of the
specified volume, apparent specific gravity of the
bulk materials to be conveyed and angle of repose
on the belt.
‫ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ و ﻋﺮض ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﺮ روي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس‬3-1-4
‫ ﮔﺮاﻧﻲ وﻳﮋه ﻇﺎﻫﺮي ﻣﻮاد ﻓﻠﻪاي ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ‬،‫ﺣﺠﻢ وﻳﮋه‬
.‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و زاوﻳﻪ ﺷﻴﺐ آزاد ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
4.1.4 In addition to the requirements of this
Standard, basic considerations in design and
selection of belt conveyors and components
should be in accordance with ANSI/CEMA 402.
،‫ ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬،‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬4-1-4
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت اﺳﺎﺳﻲ در ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﺗﺴﻤﻪاي و‬
ANSI/CEMA 402 ‫اﺟﺰاء ﻣﺮﺑﻮط آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
4.2 Belts
‫ ﺗﺴﻤﻪﻫﺎ‬2-4
4.2.1 Belts shall be sized to convey the material at
the design mass flow rate based on the lowest
specified bulk density of the material to be
conveyed.
‫ ﺗﺴﻤﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮاد در ﻣﻴﺰان ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ‬1-2-4
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺟﺮم ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻮدهاي ﻣﺎدهاي ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار‬
.‫ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ اﻧﺪازه ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬،‫اﺳﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
100
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
2 ‫ درﺟﻪ‬CEMA Grade 2 ‫ ﭘﻮﺷﺶﻫﺎي ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬2-2-4
4.2.2 Belt covers shall be CEMA Grade 2,
designed for the material conveying temperature.
.‫ﺑﻮده و ﺑﺮاي دﻣﺎي ﻣﺎده درﺣﺎل ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻲ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
4.2.3 Belt troughing idler angle shall be 35°.
.‫ درﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬35 ‫ زاوﻳﻪ ﻫﺮزﮔﺮد ﻧﺎوه اي ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬3-2-4
4.2.4 Belts as initially installed shall have no
mechanically fastened splices, and not more than
one vulcanized splice shall be used for belt
installation in the field.
‫ ﺗﺴﻤﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ در اﺑﺘﺪا ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪهاﻧﺪ ﻋﺎري‬4-2-4
‫از وﺻﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و ﺑﻴﺶ از ﻳﻚ‬
‫وﺻﻠﻪ ﺟﻮش ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺧﻮرده ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ در ﻛﺎرﮔﺎه ﺑﺮ‬
.‫روي آن اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
4.2.5 Tension rating of belting shall be based on a
mechanical splice.
‫ ﻣﻴﺰان ﻛﺸﺶ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺳﺎزي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻳﻚ وﺻﻠﻪ‬5-2-4
4.2.6 A return-belt-cleaner plow shall be provided
for conveyors without decking.
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺪون ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺳﻘﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ‬6-2-4
4.3 Pulleys
Welded steel conveyor pulleys shall be used and
designed in accordance with ANSI/MPTA 301,
and a dust proofing system and grease sealing
type lubricator shall be provided.
‫ ﻗﺮﻗﺮه ﻫﺎ‬3-4
.‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻗﺮﻗﺮهﻫﺎي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻮﻻدي ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ و ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪ‬،‫ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﺑﻜﺎر ﺑﺮده ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬ANSI/MPTA 301
‫ﻣﻘﺎوم در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﮔﺮد و ﺧﺎك و رواﻧﺴﺎز ﻧﻮع آب ﺑﻨﺪي ﮔﺮﻳﺴﻲ در‬
.‫آﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
4.4 Idlers
‫ ﻫﺮزﮔﺮدﻫﺎ‬4-4
4.4.1 Troughing idlers shall be of the three equallength-roll type.
‫ ﻫﺮزﮔﺮدﻫﺎي ﻧﺎوهاي ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻧﻮع ﺳﻪ ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﺎ‬1-4-4
4.4.2 Idler selection (CEMA series number
classification) shall be based on the type of
service specified. i.e., continuous or intermittent,
taking into account the frequency and duration of
operation.
‫ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺮزﮔﺮد )از ﺷﻤﺎره ﺳﺮي ﻫﺎي رده ﺑﻨﺪي‬2-4-4
.‫ﻃﻮل ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي‬.‫( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﻧﻮع ﻛﺎر ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬CEMA
‫ ﺑﺎ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺴﺎﻣﺪ)دﻓﻌﺎت( و‬،‫ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬،‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬
.‫ﻣﺪت ﺑﻬﺮه ﺑﺮداري از آن‬
4.4.3 Idlers shall be so arranged as to allow
replacement of individual idle pulleys from the
walkway side of the conveyor without removal of
the entire idler assembly.
‫ ﻫﺮزﮔﺮدﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻧﻪ اي ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ‬3-4-4
4.4.4 The spacing of carrying idlers shall be
determined in accordance with the belt width and
the weight of material handled, and the maximum
spacing shall be 1600 mm. The spacing under the
loading skirt shall be closely spaced where subject
to large shocks caused by the material being
conveyed.
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﻫﺮزﮔﺮدﻫﺎي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺮض‬4-4-4
4.4.5 The transition distance from the troughing
idler to the terminal pulley shall be determined in
accordance with the idler angle and belt tension
rating based on the belt width.
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل از ﻫﺮزﮔﺮد ﻧﺎوه اي ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺗﺎ ﻗﺮﻗﺮه ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬5-4-4
4.4.6 The spacing of return idler shall be 3000
mm for a belt having 1500 mm or smaller width,
and 2400 mm for a belt with a larger width.
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﻫﺮزﮔﺮد ﺑﺮﮔﺮدان ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺮض‬6-4-4
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺮﻗﺮه ﻫﺮزﮔﺮد ﺑﺪون ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎزﻛﺮدن ﺗﻤﺎم ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ‬
.‫ﻫﺮزﮔﺮد از ﻛﻨﺎر ﭘﻴﺎده راه ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ و ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي‬،‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ و وزن ﻣﺎده ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺗﺤﺖ داﻣﻨﻪ‬.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬1600 ‫ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري در ﺟﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ درﻣﻌﺮض ﺗﻜﺎنﻫﺎي ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﻣﻮاد‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﮕﺎﺗﻨﮓ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﻖ زاوﻳﻪ ﻫﺮزﮔﺮد و ﻣﻴﺰان ﻛﺸﺶ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﺮ روي ﻋﺮض‬
.‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬2400 ‫ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
101
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
4.5 Take-up
(‫ ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه )ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻦ‬5-4
4.5.1 The type of take-up devices shall be selected
in accordance with the conveyor length as shown
in Table 4.1.
56
‫ ﻧﻮع وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮل ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬1-5-4
.‫ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬1-4 ‫ﺑﮕﻮﻧﻪاي ﻛﻪ در ﺟﺪول‬
TABLE 4.1 - TYPE OF TAKE-UP FOR BELT CONVEYOR
‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬1-4 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
LENGTH OF CONVEYOR
TYPE OF TAKE-UP
‫ﻃﻮل ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻮع ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
Under 30 m (100 ft.)
(‫ ﻓﻮت‬100) ‫ ﻣﺘﺮ‬30 ‫زﻳﺮ‬
30 m (100 ft.) and over
‫ ﻓﻮت( و ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬100) ‫ ﻣﺘﺮ‬30
Screw or automatic, gravity operated
‫ ﮔﺮاﻧﺸﻲ‬،‫ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬
Automatic, gravity operated
‫ ﮔﺮاﻧﺸﻲ‬، ‫ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬
55
4.5.2 Design of gravity take-up devices shall
include the following features:
‫ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﮔﺮاﻧﺸﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬2-5-4
:‫ﺟﻨﺒﻪﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
a) Provision for future addition of counter
weights,
.‫اﻟﻒ( ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﺮاي اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ وزﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻌﺎدل در آﻳﻨﺪه‬
b) the counter weights shall be confined in an
open mesh steel cage enclosure, extending
upward from grade or floor level.
‫ب( وزﻧﻪﻫﺎي ﺗﻌﺎدل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ درون ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻗﻔﺴﻪ ﻓﻮﻻدي‬
‫ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﺑﺎز ﻛﻪ از ﻛﻒ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ زﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ اداﻣﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ‬
.‫ ﻣﺤﺼﻮر ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
4.6 Drivers and Transmissions
‫ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪهﻫﺎ و دﺳﺘﮕﺎهﻫﺎي اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻧﻴﺮو‬6-4
4.6.1 The drive unit shall be provided in the
following locations except where the optimum
location may be recommended by the Vendor:
‫ ﺟﺰ در ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪاي ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬1-6-4
‫ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در‬،‫ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
:‫ﻣﺤﻠﻬﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﻮد‬
a) At the head for horizontal and ascending
type conveyors.
.‫اﻟﻒ( ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﻧﻮع اﻓﻘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻروﻧﺪه در ﺳﺮﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬
b) at the tail for descending type conveyors.
.‫ب( ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﻧﻮع ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ روﻧﺪه در دم ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬
4.6.2 Conveyors having an ascent angle of ten
(10) degrees or more should be provided with a
single drive unit except where the Company
approves otherwise.
(10) ‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ داراي زاوﻳﻪ ﻓﺮاز ده‬2-6-4
4.6.3 A long horizontal type conveyor may use a
tandem drive unit, if the Vendor so recommends.
‫ ﻣﻴﺘﻮان در ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻧﻮع‬،‫ در ﺻﻮرت ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه‬3-6-4
‫درﺟﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه ﺗﻜﻲ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ‬
.‫ ﻣﮕﺮ در ﻣﻮاردي ﻛﻪ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ از آن را ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﺪ‬،‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫اﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ از دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﺮﻫﻢ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‬
102
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
5. CONVEYOR ACCESSORIES
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬-5
5.1 Backstop and Braking Devices
Ascending type conveyors shall be equipped with
backstop devices and descending conveyors shall
be equipped with braking devices.
The location of these devices shall be as follows,
except where the Vendor may recommend
otherwise:
‫ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﺴﺒﻨﺪ )ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ( و وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬1-5
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﻧﻮع ﺑﺎﻻروﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﺴﺒﻨﺪ )ﻣﺎﻧﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ( و ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﻧﻮع ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ روﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ‬
،‫ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ اﻳﻦ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺸﺮح زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬.‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
:‫ﻣﮕﺮ آﻧﻜﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﻣﺤﻞ دﻳﮕﺮي ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
a) Backstop devices shall be provided at both
the drive pulley shaft and electromotive axle.
‫اﻟﻒ( وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﺴﺒﻨﺪ )ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در دو ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺤﻮر‬
b) A braking device shall be provided at the
tail pulley.
‫ب( ﻳﻚ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﻗﺮه دم ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻗﺮه ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه و ﻣﺤﻮر اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺤﺮك ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ‬
.‫ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
5.2 Pull Cord Switches
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي داراي ﺑﻨﺪ ﻛﺸﺸﻲ‬2-5
5.2.1 Conveyors shall be provided with
emergency pull cord switches, unless otherwise
specified.
‫ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي داراي ﺑﻨﺪ ﻛﺸﺸﻲ اﺿﻄﺮاري‬1-2-5
5.2.2 The pull cord shall extend along the entire
length of the conveyor.
‫ ﺑﻨﺪﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در اﻣﺘﺪاد ﺗﻤﺎم ﻃﻮل ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ اداﻣﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ‬2-2-5
5.2.3 The maximum space between pull cord
switches shall not exceed 30 m.
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي داراي ﺑﻨﺪ ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬3-2-5
5.2.4 The pull cord switches shall be provided
with manual resetting at the location, where the
emergency stop has been initiated.
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي داراي ﺑﻨﺪ ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬4-2-5
5.3 Belt Cleaning Device
A return-belt-cleaner plow which meets the
characteristics of the material to be conveyed shall
be provided for the conveyor belt.
‫ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬3-5
.‫ ﻣﮕﺮ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ دﻳﮕﺮي ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻛﻨﺪ‬30 ‫از‬
‫ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬، ‫دوﺑﺎره دﺳﺘﻲ در ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫اﺿﻄﺮاري ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي وﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎي ﻣﻮادي‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬
.‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﻮد‬
5.4 Chute and Feeder
Shape and structure of chutes and feeders shall be
appropriately
designed,
based
on
the
characteristics and usage of materials to be
conveyed except where the type may conform to
manufacturer’s standard.
‫ ﺳﺮﺳﺮه و ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬4-5
‫ﺷﻜﻞ و ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﺳﺮﺳﺮهﻫﺎ و ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪهﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس‬
‫وﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎي و ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد ﻣﻮادي ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻄﻮر‬
‫ ﻣﮕﺮ در ﻣﻮاردي ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮع آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ‬،‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
5.5 Tripper and Scraper
A suitable tripper or scraper shall be used when
unloading materials from intermediate points on
the belt. Manufacturer’s standard can be used if
applicable.
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﺎرﺑﺮداري از ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎررﻳﺰ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﻪ‬
‫ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه در ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬.‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺑﻮدن ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
5.6 Conveyor Covers and Decks
‫ ﺳﺮﭘﻮشﻫﺎ و ﭘﻮﺷﺶﻫﺎي ﺳﻘﻔﻲ )ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎي ( ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬6-5
5.6.1 Half-covers shall be provided on all outdoor
installations of belt conveyors.
‫ ﺳﺮﭘﻮشﻫﺎي ﻧﻴﻢ ﭘﻮش ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺗﻤﺎم ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﺗﺴﻤﻪاي‬1-6-5
‫ ﺑﺎررﻳﺰ )ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎر( و ﻟﻴﺴﻪ‬5-5
.‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه در ﺧﺎرج ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
103
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
5.6.2 Conveyor decking shall be provided at the
loading point, and forward of it for the next 15 m.
The design shall make provisions for future
addition of decking.
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺳﻘﻔﻲ )ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﻪ( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﺎرﮔﻴﺮي و‬2-6-5
‫ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ آن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬.‫ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﻌﺪي ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﻮد‬15 ‫ﺟﻠﻮﺗﺮ از آن ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻫﺎي ﻻزم را ﺑﺮاي اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺳﻘﻔﻲ در آﻳﻨﺪه‬
.‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺳﺎزد‬
5.7 Name plate
‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت‬7-5
5.7.1 A nameplate made of stainless steel shall be
attached on a visible portion of the conveyor
indicating belt speed, rated horsepower etc.
‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ از ﻓﻮﻻد ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و‬1-7-5
5.7.2 A tag plate indicating the direction of belt
pulley rotation by an arrow shall be provided near
the driver
‫ ورﻗﻪ ﺑﺮﺑﺴﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻗﺮﻗﺮه ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬2-7-5
‫ ﺗﻮان ﻧﺎﻣﻲ و ﻏﻴﺮه ﺑﺮ آن ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬
.‫ﺑﺮ روي ﺑﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻧﻲ از ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﭘﻴﻜﺎن ﺑﺮ آن ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه ﻧﺼﺐ‬
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
6. STEEL STRUCTURES
‫ﺳﺎزهﻫﺎي ﻓﻮﻻدي‬-6
6.1 Frame
The frame for supporting the machinery
components of the conveyor shall be designed in
accordance with AISC Standard.
‫ ﻗﺎب‬1-6
‫ﻗﺎب ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري اﺟﺰاء ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ آﻻت ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬
.‫ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬AISC ‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
6.2 Platforms, Walkway
‫ ﭘﻴﺎده راهﻫﺎ‬،‫ ﺳﻜﻮﻫﺎ‬2-6
6.2.1 Platforms shall be provided in convenient
locations for the operation and maintenance of the
belt conveyor.
Grating shall be used for platform flooring, except
along those sections of the conveyor furnished
with decking. In such cases, the floor plate shall
be checkered plate.
‫ ﺳﻜﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﺤﻞﻫﺎي ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻬﺮه ﺑﺮداري و‬1-2-6
.‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﺗﺴﻤﻪاي ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ در اﻣﺘﺪاد آن ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ از ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ورﻗﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻒ ﺳﺎزي‬،‫ﺳﻘﻔﻲ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﻒ ﺳﺎزي ﺳﻜﻮﻫﺎ در ﻣﺤﻞﻫﺎي داراي‬.‫ﺳﻜﻮﻫﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺳﻘﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ورﻗﻪﻫﺎي آﺟﺪار اﻧﺠﺎم ﮔﻴﺮد‬
6.2.2 Walkways shall be provided as follows:
:‫ ﭘﻴﺎده راﻫﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬2-2-6
a) Along the entire length of the conveyor
which cannot be maintained from the operating
platform and in all locations where the belt top
elevation exceeds 2000 mm from the grade or
platform.
‫اﻟﻒ( در اﻣﺘﺪاد ﺗﻤﺎم ﻃﻮل ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ در ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن‬
b) Along one side only for a conveyor belt less
than 1000 mm in width and along both sides
for a conveyor belt being 1000 mm or over in
width.
‫ب( در اﻣﺘﺪاد ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻬﻠﻮي ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪاي ﻛﻪ ﻋﺮض آن‬
c) Hand railing and toeplates shall be provided
on walkways along the outside edge (farthest
from the belt).
‫ج( ﻧﺮده دﺳﺖ اﻧﺪاز و ورﻗﻪ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺎﺧﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در اﻣﺘﺪاد ﻟﺒﻪ‬
d) Across belt conveyors as required to permit
access for operation and maintenance, and
where the conveyor layout interferes with
grade level pedestrian accessways.
‫د( در ﻋﺮض ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎ در ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻬﺮه‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ از ﺳﻜﻮﻫﺎي ﺑﻬﺮه ﺑﺮداري وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد و در‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎم ﻣﺤﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺑﺎﻻي ﺗﺴﻤﻪ از ﺳﻄﺢ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻜﻮ‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬2000 ‫از‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و در اﻣﺘﺪاد ﻫﺮ دو ﭘﻬﻠﻮي‬1000 ‫از‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬1000 ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪاي ﻛﻪ ﻋﺮض آن‬
‫ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ ﭘﻴﺎده راﻫﻬﺎ )دورﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎده راﻫﻬﺎ از ﺗﺴﻤﻪ( ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ‬
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ و در ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ در‬،‫ﺑﺮداري و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ زﻣﻴﻦ راهﻫﺎي دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﻋﺎﺑﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎده را ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻲ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﺪ‬
104
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
7. MATERIALS
Materials to be employed in the manufacture and
fabrication of components of the conveyor shall
comply with the ASTM Standard specifications or
equivalent.
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ ﻣﻮاد‬-7
‫ﻣﻮادي ﻛﻪ در ﺳﺎﺧﺖ و ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ اﺟﺰاء ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﻜﺎر ﻣﻲ روﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﺎدل آن ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ داﺷﺘﻪ‬ASTM ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
8. SAFETY
‫ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬-8
8.1 Belt conveyors shall be designed with safety
provisions for the protection of operating
personnel, in accordance with safety standards for
conveyors and related Equipment ANSI B 20.1.
‫ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﺗﺴﻤﻪاي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬1-8
8.2 The constructional features and quality of belt
conveyors shall be determined on the bases of
their intended service life and condition of usage.
‫ ﺟﻨﺒﻪﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ و ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﺗﺴﻤﻪاي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ‬2-8
8.3 The belt conveyors shall be capable of
operation within the specified noise limits.
‫ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﺗﺴﻤﻪاي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﻨﺪ در ﺣﺪود ﺻﺪاي ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬3-8
9. INSPECTION AND TESTING
The conveyors completed in the fabrication shop
or field assembled shall be subjected to the
following inspections and tests after being
assembled:
‫ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ و آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‬-9
a) Visual
assemblies.
and
dimensional
check
‫ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎي‬ANSI B20.1 ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎ و اﺟﺰاء ﻣﺮﺑﻮط‬
.‫ﻻزم ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻛﺎرﻛﻨﺎن ﺑﻬﺮهﺑﺮداري ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫اﺳﺎس ﻋﻤﺮ ﻛﺎري و ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﺼﺮف ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﺷﺪه ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ در ﻛﺎرﮔﺎه ﺳﺮﻫﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺲ از ﺳﻮار ﺷﺪن در ﻣﻌﺮض ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻫﺎ و‬
:‫آزﻣﻮن ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
.‫اﻟﻒ( ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ اﺑﻌﺎدي و ﭼﺸﻤﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪﻫﺎ‬
of
b) Noise level check under no load conditions.
.(‫ب( ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﺪا ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺑﻲ ﺑﺎري )ﻫﺮزﮔﺮدي‬
c) Running test and performance test of
assemblies.
.‫ج( آزﻣﻮن راهاﻧﺪازي و آزﻣﻮن ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪﻫﺎ‬
d) Safety device check under no load
conditions.
.(‫د( ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺑﻲ ﺑﺎري)ﻫﺮزﮔﺮدي‬
10. CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
In the case of conflict between documents relating
to the inquiry or order, the following priority of
documents shall apply:
‫ ﻣﻐﺎﻳﺮت در اﺳﻨﺎد‬-10
‫در ﺻﻮرت وﺟﻮد اﺧﺘﻼف و ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺾ در اﺳﻨﺎد و ﻣﺪارك ﻣﺮﺑﻮط‬
‫ اﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ در ﻣﻮرد ﻣﺪارك‬،‫ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﻌﻼم ﻳﺎ ﺳﻔﺎرش ﺧﺮﻳﺪ‬
:‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
- First Priority: Purchase order and variations
thereto.
‫ ﺳﻔﺎرش ﺧﺮﻳﺪ )ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ( و ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات‬: ‫ اوﻟﻮﻳﺖ اول‬.‫داده ﺷﺪه در آﻧﻬﺎ‬
- Second Priority:This Standard specification.
.‫ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬: ‫ اوﻟﻮﻳﺖ دوم‬‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻐﺎﻳﺮت ﻫﺎ در اﺳﻨﺎد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺼﻮرت ﻛﺘﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ارﺟﺎع‬
،‫ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار در ﺻﻮرت ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺮاي روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬.‫داده ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻣﺪارك ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪي را ﺻﺎدر ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‬
All conflicting requirements shall be referred to
the Purchaser in writing. The Purchaser will issue
confirmation document if needed for clarification.
11. PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT
‫ آﻣﺎده ﺳﺎزي ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻤﻞ‬-11
11.1 Equipment shall be suitably prepared for the
type of shipment specified. The preparation shall
be mutually agreed upon and unless otherwise
specified, shall make the equipment suitable for 2
years of outdoor storage from the time of
shipment.
‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻮع ﺣﻤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬1-11
‫ ﻧﺤﻮه آﻣﺎده ﻛﺮدن آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ‬.‫ﺑﻄﻮرﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ آﻣﺎده ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻦ رﺳﻴﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و در ﺻﻮرﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ دﻳﮕﺮي ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺒﺎر ﻛﺮدن در ﻓﻀﺎي آزاد ﺑﻪ‬
.‫ ﺳﺎل از زﻣﺎن ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬2 ‫ﻣﺪت‬
105
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
11.2 The Vendor shall provide the Purchaser with
the instructions necessary to preserve the integrity
of the storage preparation after the equipment
arrives at the job site and before start-up.
‫ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻻزم را ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻔﻆ‬2-11
11.3 One copy of the manufacturer’s standard
installation instructions, operation/maintenance
manual shall be packed and shipped with the
equipment.
‫ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ از دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه‬3-11
11.4 Each part of the equipment shall be suffixed
with a metal tag indicating its name and part
number to facilitate assembling.
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺳﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روي ﻫﺮ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬4-11
In addition each package shall be tagged with
packing list.
‫ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮ آن ﻫﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي ﺑﺮﺑﺴﺖ ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪه ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
11.5 Unless otherwise specified,
shipment of equipment is not allowed.
‫ ﺣﻤﻞ‬،‫ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮه دﻳﮕﺮي ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﺸﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬5-11
‫ﻳﻜﭙﺎرﭼﮕﻲ ﻣﻮارد ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ اﻧﺒﺎرﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﭘﺲ از وارد‬
‫ﺷﺪن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎرﮔﺎه و ﻗﺒﻞ از آﻏﺎز ﺑﻜﺎر آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮاي‬
.‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
.‫ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﺑﺮﺑﺴﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎم و ﺷﻤﺎره ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺑﺮ آن ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه‬
separate
.‫ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺠﺎز ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
12. GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY
‫ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ و ﺗﻌﻬﺪ‬-12
Unless exception is recorded by the Vendor in his
proposal, it shall be understood that the Vendor
agrees to the following guarantee and warranties:
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه در ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﺧﻮد اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻧﻜﺮده ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫اﻳﻨﻄﻮر ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ و ﺗﻌﻬﺪ زﻳﺮ ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ‬
:‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در‬،‫ ﻣﺎه ﭘﺲ از ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ راه اﻧﺪازي‬12 ‫در ﺧﻼل‬
‫اﺳﺮع وﻗﺖ و ﺑﺪون ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﻛﺎﻻ ﻫﺎ و ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺗﻲ از‬
‫ ﻋﺪم ﻣﻬﺎرت در ﻛﺎر ﻳﺎ‬،‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﻮب ﺑﻮدن ﻣﻮاد‬
‫از ﻗﻠﻢ اﻓﺘﺎدﮔﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻫﻲ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه داراي ﻧﻘﺺ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ را‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﺪ و ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺑﻮﻳﮋه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي دﻳﮕﺮي را ﻛﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات در ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺼﺮف آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ وي‬
.‫ﭘﺮداﺧﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
During a period of 12 months after the date of
commissioning, the Vendor shall, with all possible
speed and without cost to the Purchaser, replace
or repair the goods or any part thereof found to be
defective due to faulty material workmanship or
to any act or omission of the Vendor. In the
particular the Vendor shall reimburse any
transportation and other charges incurred by the
Purchaser in effecting such replacement or repair
at the point of use.
106
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
22
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
APPENDICES
٢٣
APPENDIX A
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ اﻟﻒ‬
INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED WITH
INQUIRY OR ORDER
.‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻔﺎرش اراﺋﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
The following particulars will enable the
manufacturer to select the most suitable
equipment from his production range to suit the
proposed application:
‫وﻳﮋﮔﻲﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه را ﻗﺎدر ﻣﻲ ﺳﺎزد ﺗﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را از داﻣﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪات ﺧﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي‬
:‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ اﺳﺖ را ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
1) Bulk density of the material to be conveyed.
.‫( ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻮدهاي ﻣﺎدهاي ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮد‬1
2) Any special operational conditions (such as
in high temperatures, or in dusty, corrosive or
abrasive atmospheres, or in humid or wet
conditions, or on exposed sites).
،‫( ﻫﺮ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﺎري وﻳﮋه )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻛﺎرﻛﺮدن در دﻣﺎﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ‬2
‫ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ‬،‫ ﺧﻮرﻧﺪه ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﻨﺪه‬،‫ﻳﺎ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﮔﺮدآﻟﻮد‬
.(‫ ﻳﺎ در ﻛﺎرﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎي در ﻣﻌﺮض دﻳﺪ‬،‫ﺧﻴﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻤﻨﺎك‬
.‫( وﻳﮋﮔﻲﻫﺎي ﺑﺮق رﺳﺎﻧﻲ‬3
3) Electric supply characteristics.
‫ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬،‫ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺟﺎﻧﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي‬،‫( در ﺻﻮرت اﻣﻜﺎن‬4
4) If possible, a sketch of the proposed layout,
with such details as available clearance
heights.
.‫ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻫﺎي آزاد ﻣﻮﺟﻮد‬
107
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
24
APPENDIX B
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ب‬
٢۵
Information to be Supplied by Manufacturer
before Placing the Order
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻧﺠﺎم ﺳﻔﺎرش ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه‬
Prior to placing purchase orders for conveyor
system, components, detailed drawings or data for
the following shall be submitted:
،‫ اﺟﺰاء آن‬،‫ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻧﺠﺎم ﺳﻔﺎرش ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‬
:‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎي ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت ﻳﺎ دادهﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻮارد زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اراﺋﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫اراﺋﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
a) Device for cleaning the conveying surface
of the belt.
‫اﻟﻒ( وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ازﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎر ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ‬
b) Length or each type and size of belt to be
furnished for field splices.
‫ب( ﻃﻮل ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮع و اﻧﺪازه ﺗﺴﻤﻪاي ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي وﺻﻠﻪﻫﺎي‬
.‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪه در ﺗﻤﺎس اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﻛﺎرﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﻮد‬
:‫ج( ﻧﻮع و ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺮزﮔﺮدﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ‬
c) Type and location of the following idlers:
.‫( ﻫﺮزﮔﺮدﻫﺎي ﺿﺮﺑﻪاي در ﻧﻘﺎط ﺑﺎرﮔﻴﺮي‬1
1) Impact idlers at loading points.
.‫( ﻫﺮزﮔﺮدﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ و روي ﺗﺴﻤﻪ در ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﮔﺮدش‬2
2) Training idlers for top and bottom runs.
.‫( ﻫﺮزﮔﺮدﻫﺎي ﺑﺮﮔﺮدان ﻧﻮع ﺧﻮد ﺗﻤﻴﺰﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬3
3) Self-cleaning type return idlers.
.‫( ﻫﺮزﮔﺮدﻫﺎي اﻧﺘﻘﺎل‬4
4) Transition idlers.
.‫د( ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺑﺮاي آب ﺑﻨﺪي و روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺮزﮔﺮد‬
d) Seal and lubrication design for the idler
bearing.
.‫ه( ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻗﺮﻗﺮه ﮔﺮداﻧﻨﺪه و ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺑﻨﺪي آن‬
e) Drive pulley and lagging design.
.‫و( ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻗﺮﻗﺮه‬
f) Pulley bearing design.
.‫ز( وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺷﺘﺎب‬
g) Acceleration/deceleration control devices.
h) Structural provisions for future addition of
decking.
‫ح( ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎري ﺑﺮاي اﻓﺰودن ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺳﻘﻒ‬
i) Splicing procedure and special devices
(if any) shall be supplied by the Vendor.
‫ط( روش وﺻﻠﻪ زﻧﻲ و وﺳﺎﻳﻞ وﻳﮋه آن )اﮔﺮ وﺟﻮد دارد( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
.‫در آﻳﻨﺪه‬
.‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﻮد‬
108
Mar. 2009/ 1388 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-M-GN-210(1)
APPENDIX C
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ج‬
Vendor Data Requirements after Receipt of
Order
‫دادهﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﭘﺲ از درﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
Vendor shall furnish the following data in the
number of copies and in the number of calendar
days agreed upon by the Purchaser after receipt of
order. Certified data shall be submitted within
thirty (30) calendar days after return of approval
for data:
‫ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دادهﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ را در ﺗﻌﺪاد و ﻧﺴﺦ و در روزﻫﺎي‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ از درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺳﻔﺎرش ﺑﺎ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ روز ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻤﻲ ﭘﺲ‬30 ‫ دادهﻫﺎي ﮔﻮاﻫﻲ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻇﺮف‬.‫اراﺋﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
:‫از ﺑﺮﮔﺮداﻧﺪن دادهﻫﺎي ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه اراﺋﻪ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﺳﻔﺎرش اراﺋﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫( ﻧﻘﺸﻪ آراﻳﺶ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬1
1) Equipment general arrangement DWG.
.‫( اﺑﻌﺎد ﻃﺮح ﻛﻠﻲ‬2
2) Outline dimensions.
.‫( ﺑﺮش ﻫﺎي ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‬3
3) Cross sections.
.‫ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎر و ﻏﻴﺮه‬،‫( ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﭘﻲ رﻳﺰي‬4
4) Foundation layout, anchor bolt details, etc.
.‫( ﻧﻤﻮدارﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ‬5
5) Wiring diagrams.
‫( ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺟﺎﻧﻤﺎﺋﻲ و اﺑﻌﺎد ﺻﻔﺤﺎت اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ‬6
6) Instrument panel layout & dimensions.
7) Erection drawings, & diagrams.
.‫( ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎ و ﻧﻤﻮدارﻫﺎي ﺑﺮﭘﺎ ﻛﺮدن‬7
8) Instrument installation DWG’s.
.‫( ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎي ﻧﺼﺐ اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ‬8
.‫( ﺟﺪول ﻣﻮاد‬9
9) Bill of materials.
.‫( ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت‬10
10) Complete part list.
11) Recommended spare parts for 2 years of
operation.
.‫( ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻳﺪﻛﻲ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺮاي دو ﺳﺎل ﻛﺎر دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬11
12)
Recommended
Commissioning.
for
.‫( ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻳﺪﻛﻲ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺮاي راهاﻧﺪازي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬12
13) Completed specification sheets giving
manufacturer, size, type of model and
specification of equipment.
، ‫( ﺑﺮﮔﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﺷﺪه ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎم ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه‬13
14) Instructions-installation, operation, and
maintenance manual as requested.
‫ ﺑﻬﺮه ﺑﺮداري و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬،‫( دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞﻫﺎي ﻧﺼﺐ‬14
spare
parts
‫ ﻧﻮع ﻣﺪل و ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را در اﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬،‫اﻧﺪازه‬
.‫ﺑﮕﺬارد‬
.‫ﻃﺒﻖ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ‬
109